Design
ଗାଇଡ୍: 1402 · ବିଭାଗ: 16
ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ, ଡିଜାଇନ ଏବଂ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ45
- Control who sees a design in the design portalLearn how design visibility works for designers and admins and how access decides which designs appear in the design portal.
- Give edit access to a shared design via Home share and inviteSharing a design link alone does not grant editing, so invite the person by email from the Home tab to give them edit access.
- ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନରେ ଏକ SketchUp SKP ଫାଇଲ ଆମଦାନୀ କରନ୍ତୁSKP ଫାଇଲ 100 MB ରୁ କମ ରହିଲେ, 3D ଆମଦାନୀ ସହିତ ଏକ SketchUp ମଡେଲକୁ ଆପଣଙ୍କ ଡିଜାଇନରେ ଆଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Publish your own designs as reusable templatesTurn your own models into templates that appear under 'All templates' for reuse, editing or showcasing.
- ବିଲୋପିତ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପୁନଃସ୍ଥାପିତ କରନ୍ତୁବିଲୋପିତ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକ ସ୍ଥାୟୀଭାବେ ହଜି ନଥାଏ, ଏବଂ ଜଣେ ଖାତା ଆଡମିନ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଫେରାଇ ଆଣିପାରିବେ।
- Share a design with another userGive another user access to a design so they can continue working on it.
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (45)
- ଏକ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍, ଖାଲି ପୃଷ୍ଠା କିମ୍ବା ଆପଣଙ୍କର ନିଜସ୍ୱ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ରୁ ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଆରମ୍ଭ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ Infurnia ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍, ଏକ ଖାଲି ପୃଷ୍ଠା କିମ୍ବା ପୁନରାବୃତ୍ତି ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ପାଇଁ ଆପଣ ସଞ୍ଚୟ କରିଥିବା ଏକ କଷ୍ଟମ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ରୁ ଏକ ନୂଆ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଆରମ୍ଭ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Create a new design projectCreate a project, name it, and start a new design from a template or a blank template to begin modelling.
- How designs auto-save and how to restore an earlier versionLearn how every meaningful action is saved automatically as a named version and how to go back to an earlier state from the version history.
- Start Design ରୁ ଏକ ପ୍ରସ୍ତୁତ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁStart Design ଆପଣଙ୍କୁ ପୂର୍ବରୁ ତିଆରି ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ ଦିଏ, ଯାହାକୁ ଆପଣ ଖୋଲି ଗ୍ରାହକଙ୍କୁ ତୁରନ୍ତ ଦେଖାଇପାରିବେ କିମ୍ବା ନୂଆ ଡିଜାଇନ ପାଇଁ ଖାଲିରୁ ଆରମ୍ଭ କରିପାରିବେ।
- ଏକ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ଫୋଲ୍ଡର ଭିତରେ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକର ନାମ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ, କପି କରନ୍ତୁ କିମ୍ବା ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁଏହାର ଡିଜାଇନ୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକ ପରିଚାଳନା କରିବାକୁ ଏକ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ସେହି ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ଫୋଲ୍ଡର ଭିତରେ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକ କପି କରନ୍ତୁ, ନାମ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ କିମ୍ବା ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- Use default templates for quick kitchen and bedroom conceptsPick a default template when starting a new design to show a client a rough idea of their kitchen or bedroom before the design is confirmed.
- ବେଡ୍, ଅଧ୍ୟୟନ ଟେବୁଲ୍ ଏବଂ ଅନ୍ୟାନ୍ୟ ପାଇଁ ପ୍ରସ୍ତୁତ କାଟାଲଗ୍ ମଡ୍ୟୁଲ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁକାଟାଲଗ୍ରୁ ପ୍ରସ୍ତୁତ ଫର୍ନିଚର ମଡ୍ୟୁଲ୍ ରଖନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ନିର୍ମାଣ ବିକଳ୍ପ ସହିତ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଅନୁକୂଳ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Access the design workspace in Google Chrome on desktopUse Google Chrome on a desktop OS to access the design workspace.
- Copy design content between projectsCopy elements from one design and paste them into another so the same item is reproduced with pricing still fetched from the admin portal.
- Create a project with a mandatory name and start a new designCreate a new project by giving it a mandatory name, then start a new design from a default or blank template.
- Create a room from a template and set its name and typeStart a new design from a room template, then rename the room and set its type.
- Fix a design that opens in view mode and cannot be editedA design you can only view opens in view mode, where panels and components cannot be selected or edited, so you need edit access to inspect or change it.
- Mark a design as a room template for reuseMark a design as a template so you can reuse it for future designs.
- Organise designs as versions and client options in a projectCreate several designs inside one project so each one works as a version or a copy for your client options.
- ଆଡମିନ ପୋର୍ଟାଲରୁ ଏକ ଡିଲିଟ ହୋଇଥିବା ଡିଜାଇନ ପୁନଃସ୍ଥାପିତ କରନ୍ତୁProject Hub > Design Hub > Deleted Designs ଅଧୀନରେ ଏକ ଡିଲିଟ ହୋଇଥିବା ଡିଜାଇନ ଖୋଜନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏକ କ୍ଲିକରେ ଏହାକୁ ଏହାର ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟକୁ ପୁନଃସ୍ଥାପିତ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପୋର୍ଟାଲରେ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ଖୋଜନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଡିଲିଟ୍ ହୋଇଥିବା ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଖୋଜନ୍ତୁପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ, କ୍ଲାଏଣ୍ଟ କିମ୍ବା ମ୍ୟାନେଜର ନାମ ଦ୍ୱାରା All Projects ଖୋଜନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ Deleted Items ଅଧୀନରେ ଡିଲିଟ୍ ହୋଇଥିବା ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଓ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ଖୋଜନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍, କଷ୍ଟମ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ କିମ୍ବା ଖାଲି କ୍ୟାନଭାସ୍ରୁ ଏକ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ଆରମ୍ଭ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ପୂର୍ବ-ନିର୍ଧାରିତ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପ୍ରକାର, ଆପଣଙ୍କର ନିଜସ୍ୱ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ କିମ୍ବା ଏକ ଖାଲି କ୍ୟାନଭାସ୍ରୁ ଏକ ନୂଆ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ଆରମ୍ଭ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Understand design portal access for production designersLearn how production designer access controls the production designs tab and limits designers to their own assigned projects.
- Access the design portal and find your projectsOpen the design portal in a browser at the design subdomain, sign in with your account ID and password, and find your projects from the portal home.
- Copy or import a construction, edit it, then publish and verify via Excel reportEdit a construction or import settings from styles and apply the changes.
- Create a project and start from a reusable templateCreate a new project in the design portal and start your design from a reusable template or a blank one.
- ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପୋର୍ଟାଲରୁ ନାମ ଏବଂ ଗ୍ରାହକ ବିବରଣୀ ସହିତ ଏକ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ନାମ ଏବଂ ଗ୍ରାହକ ବିବରଣୀ ଦାଖଲ କରି ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପୋର୍ଟାଲରୁ ଏକ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ create project ସହିତ ସମାପ୍ତ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Find your way around the design portal homeLearn what the design portal home sidebar and top-right links open, from projects and production designs to tutorials, support, admin and account settings.
- Get answers in the Design module without waiting for supportUse the help chat, help articles and tutorials in the Design module to answer how-to questions and keep working without waiting for a live support person.
- Link a designer to production in user managementLink the designer to production in user management so they can work on production.
- Manage multiple designs and deleted items in a projectKeep several designs in one project and find deleted projects and designs in a separate deleted section.
- ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନକୁ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ ଭାବରେ ଚିହ୍ନଟ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଡିଜାଇନକୁ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ ଭାବରେ ଚିହ୍ନଟ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏଥିରୁ କେଉଁ SKU ଡାଟା, ନିୟମ ଏବଂ ପସନ୍ଦ ଓ ସେଟିଂସ ସଂରକ୍ଷିତ ରଖିବେ ତାହା ବାଛନ୍ତୁ।
- Mark a design as a template and keep its SKU data, rules and settingsMark a design as a template and choose which of its SKU Data, Rules, Preferences and Settings carry over instead of the admin defaults.
- ସମସ୍ତ ଡିଜାଇନରଙ୍କ ସହିତ ଅଂଶୀଦାର କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନକୁ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ ଭାବରେ ଚିହ୍ନିତ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଡିଜାଇନକୁ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ ଭାବରେ ଚିହ୍ନିତ କରନ୍ତୁ ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଏହା 'Start new design' ଅଧୀନରେ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଡିଜାଇନରଙ୍କ ପାଇଁ ଉପଲବ୍ଧ ହେବ।
- ଉନ୍ନତ ବିକଳ୍ପ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍କୁ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ ଭାବରେ ଚିହ୍ନିତ କରନ୍ତୁଉନ୍ନତ ବିକଳ୍ପ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍କୁ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ ଭାବରେ ଚିହ୍ନିତ କରି ମୂଳ ସାମଗ୍ରୀ ଭଳି ପସନ୍ଦଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସଞ୍ଚୟ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ ସଂସ୍କରଣଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ବହୁଗୁଣିତ ହେବାରୁ ରୋକନ୍ତୁ।
- Open the design portal directly by typing its URLLoad the design portal in a new browser tab by typing its URL so you can reach new and recent projects.
- Read major product updates in What's NewOpen the What's New section to read articles about recent updates and features.
- Rename a design from the design viewChange the design name shown next to the design label in the design view.
- Mark as template ସହିତ ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍କୁ ପୁନଃବ୍ୟବହାରଯୋଗ୍ୟ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ ଭାବରେ ସେଭ୍ କରନ୍ତୁସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ ହୋଇଥିବା ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍କୁ ପୁନଃବ୍ୟବହାରଯୋଗ୍ୟ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ ଭାବରେ ସେଭ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ନୂଆ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ସମୟରେ ସେହି ଲେଆଉଟ୍ ଏବଂ ଉପସ୍ଥାପନା ଫର୍ମାଟ୍ ପୁନଃବ୍ୟବହାର କରାଯାଇପାରିବ।
- ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ସେୟାର କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଡିଜାଇନରମାନଙ୍କୁ ଆମନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରନ୍ତୁଡିଜାଇନ୍ ସେୟାରିଂ ଚାଲୁ କରିବା, କାହାର ପ୍ରବେଶ ଅଛି ଦେଖିବା, ଇମେଲ ଦ୍ୱାରା ଜଣେ ଡିଜାଇନରଙ୍କୁ ଆମନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରିବା ଏବଂ Version History ରୁ ବ୍ରାଞ୍ଚ ଓ ସଂସ୍କରଣ ପରିଚାଳନା କରିବା ପାଇଁ Home ରୁ Share Design ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁ।
- Home ଟ୍ୟାବ୍, Share, Invite ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଏକ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ସେୟାର କରନ୍ତୁଅନ୍ୟ ଜଣେ ବ୍ୟବହାରକାରୀଙ୍କୁ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଇମେଲ୍ ID ସହିତ ଆମନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରି ଏକ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟରେ ପ୍ରବେଶ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ।
- Start every new project from a blank projectBegin each new project from a blank project that loads into an empty page, then draft the floor plan from there.
- ଡିଜାଇନିଂକୁ ଫେରିବା ପାଇଁ ଆପ୍ ଭିତରର ବ୍ୟାକ୍ ବଟନ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁଇଣ୍ଟରଫେସ୍ ଭିତରେ ଥିବା ଆପ୍ଲିକେସନର ନିଜସ୍ୱ ବ୍ୟାକ୍ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଡିଜାଇନିଂକୁ ଫେରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ design ଖୋଲିବା ସମୟରେ 'Added missing components' ନାମକ ଏକ version କାହିଁକି ଦେଖାଯାଏକେବଳ ଏକ design ଖୋଲିବା ଦ୍ୱାରା 'Added missing components' ନାମକ ଏକ version କିପରି ସୃଷ୍ଟି ହୋଇପାରେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
ୱାଲ, ରୁମ ଏବଂ ଆର୍କିଟେକ୍ଚର193
- Add false ceiling as a child of the true ceilingAdd a true ceiling to the room first, then draw the false ceiling with the extrude rectangle tool and set its drop height and slab thickness.
- Add strip lights using rectangle, line or three-point arcAdd strip lights from Insert > Strip light and draw them as a rectangle, a line or a three-point arc, then set their intensity and colour.
- Change model, flip door sides/hinge, and set window sill heightPlace a door or window, then adjust its model, opening direction, hinge position and dimensions from its properties.
- AutoCAD ରେ ଡ୍ରାଫ୍ଟ ନକରି ଆପ୍ ଭିତରେ ଫଲ୍ସ ସିଲିଂ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଟୁଲରେ ସିଧାସଳଖ କଷ୍ଟମାଇଜଡ୍ ଫଲ୍ସ ସିଲିଂ ମଡେଲ୍ କରି ଆପଣଙ୍କ ଡିଜାଇନରେ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ ପ୍ରକୃତ ଛାତ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଅଫସେଟ ସହିତ ଏକ ମିଥ୍ୟା ଛାତ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁଛାତ ଉପକରଣ ସହିତ ଏକ ପ୍ରକୃତ ଛାତ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏକ ଆୟତକ୍ଷେତ୍ର ଆଙ୍କି କିମ୍ବା ପାରିପାର୍ଶ୍ୱିକ ଛାତ ପାଇଁ ଏକ କପି ଅଫସେଟ କରି ଏକ ମିଥ୍ୟା ଛାତ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନକୁ ରୁମ, ଫ୍ଲୋର ଏବଂ ବିଲଡିଂରେ ସଂଗଠିତ କରନ୍ତୁଡିଜାଇନ ସ୍ପେସ କିପରି ରୁମ, ଫ୍ଲୋର ଏବଂ ବିଲଡିଂ ସ୍ତରରେ ସଂଗଠିତ ହୁଏ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ଏକ ଘରର ଏକାଧିକ ମହଲା ଥିଲେ ଫ୍ଲୋର ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁ।
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (193)
- Start a design from the room template and resize its wallsStart a new design from the room template, which comes with a pre-created room, then resize it by selecting walls and changing their dimensions.
- ଆର୍କିଟେକ୍ଚର ମଡ୍ୟୁଲ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଗ୍ରାନାଇଟ କିମ୍ବା ପଥର ସ୍ଲାବ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଆର୍କିଟେକ୍ଚର ମଡ୍ୟୁଲରେ ଏକ ଗ୍ରାନାଇଟ କିମ୍ବା ପଥର କାଉଣ୍ଟରଟପ ସ୍ଲାବ ରଖନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏହାର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏହାକୁ ସ୍ଥାନରେ ସ୍ନାପ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାର ମୋଟେଇ ଓ ସାମଗ୍ରୀ ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- କାନ୍ଥ ବିଭାଗ ଏବଂ ସନ୍ଧାନ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ କାନ୍ଥରେ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଆପଣଙ୍କ ଭିତର କାନ୍ଥ ପାଇଁ ୱାଲ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଚାଲୁ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସନ୍ଧାନ କରି ଆପଣ ଚାହୁଁଥିବା ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ବେସ ଖୋଜନ୍ତୁ।
- Add wall skirting to a wallSelect a wall and toggle on wall skirting to add skirting to it.
- କାନ୍ଥ ବିଭାଗର ପ୍ରପର୍ଟି ପ୍ୟାନେଲରୁ ୱାଲ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଲଗାନ୍ତୁକାନ୍ଥ ବିଭାଗର ପ୍ରପର୍ଟି ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ Wall Skirting ଚାଲୁ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ କାନ୍ଥରେ ଲଗାଇବା ପାଇଁ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଫିନିଶ୍ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ।
- Change door/window model, width, thickness, flip side and hingeSelect a door or window and use the modify menu to change its model, width, thickness, opening side and hinge position.
- Create a room and copy its tiling, flooring and ceiling to other roomsAdd a room on the floor plan, finish it with tiles and ceiling finishes, then copy-paste its elements into other rooms to reuse the setup.
- ସ୍ଲାବ୍ ଟୁଲ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଏକ ଅଲଗା ରୋଷେଇଘର ପ୍ଲାଟଫର୍ମ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁମାନକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ଧାଡ଼ିରୁ ଅଲଗା ରହୁଥିବା ଏକ କଷ୍ଟମ ରୋଷେଇଘର ପ୍ଲାଟଫର୍ମ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Create curved walls from the walls toolPick the curved wall option in the walls dropdown to draw a curved wall, then fine-tune its radius and other properties.
- Set wall height and slab thickness from ceiling elevationEstablish the correct wall height for a kitchen layout by reading the ceiling's elevation and setting the slab thickness from the same panel.
- Add a hob at countertop level and a chimney at furniture levelPlace a hob on the countertop and a chimney through the furniture level so both sit correctly in the design.
- Add cabinets by picking and dropping units from the catalogueOpen the catalogue, choose a base unit category and pick a cabinet of the required width, then drop it into the layout to build your design.
- ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନରୁ ସିଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏଲିଭେସନକୁ କାନ୍ଥ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସହିତ ମେଳାନ୍ତୁଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ ଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ ସିଲିଂ ବିକଳ୍ପ ଚୟନ କରି ଏବଂ କୋଠରୀ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଏହାକୁ ଲାଗୁ କରି ସିଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- Add columns, beams and slabs from the architecture toolsPlace columns, beams and slabs on your floor plan and adjust their dimensions, end points, height and thickness.
- ମିଥ୍ୟା ଛାତ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ପୂର୍ବରୁ ପ୍ରକୃତ ଛାତ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁପ୍ରଥମେ ଏକ ପ୍ରକୃତ ଛାତ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାପରେ ଆପଣ ଏହା ଉପରେ ଏକ ମିଥ୍ୟା ଛାତ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ କରିପାରିବେ।
- ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନ୍ ଉପରେ କ୍ଲିକ୍ କରି ଦ୍ୱାର ଓ ୱିଣ୍ଡୋର ସ୍ଥାନ ଆଡଜଷ୍ଟ କରନ୍ତୁଦ୍ୱାର କିମ୍ବା ୱିଣ୍ଡୋର ସ୍ଥାନ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନ୍ ଉପରେ କ୍ଲିକ୍ କରି ନୂଆ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ଟାଇପ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏହାଦ୍ୱାରା ଏହା ସ୍ଥାନାନ୍ତରିତ ହେବ, ଏବଂ ୱିଣ୍ଡୋର ପ୍ରସ୍ଥ, ଉଚ୍ଚତା, ମୋଟେଇ ଓ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସ୍ତର ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Create a false ceiling from an RCC slabAdd a ceiling, then use its Create False Ceiling option to draft a false ceiling, since a slab drawn with the Slabs tool has no such option.
- Create a peripheral false ceiling with curved corners using filletDraw an inset rectangle on the ceiling, round its corners with the Fillet tool, then set the drop depth and material.
- Create a room by closing all walls into a loopClose all wall segments into a fully closed loop without overlapping boundary lines so the software generates the room automatically.
- ସ୍ଲାବ୍ ଟୁଲ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ସେମି-ମଡ୍ୟୁଲାର୍ ରୋଷେଇଘର ଉପାଦାନ କିମ୍ବା ଲଫ୍ଟ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁସ୍ଲାବ୍ କ୍ଷେତ୍ର ପାଇଁ ଏକ ଆୟତକ୍ଷେତ୍ର ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ସେଟିଂସ୍ରେ ଏହାର ମାଳଠାରୁ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଏବଂ ମୋଟେଇ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ବକ୍ର କଟା ସମର୍ଥିତ ନୁହେଁ; କେବଳ ସିଧା କଟା ମେସିନ୍ ଦ୍ୱାରା କରାଯାଇପାରିବLearn which cuts can be machined, so you can plan wall-panel grooves at a set depth and interval instead of curved cuts.
- Find drawing tools and switch 2D/3D views in the navigation toolbarUse the navigation toolbar at the top of the design screen to reach all drawing and placement options and to switch between the 2D floor plan and 3D view.
- DWG ଭାବରେ ଏକ ଫ୍ଲୋର କିପରି ଏକ୍ସପୋର୍ଟ କରିବେଫାଇଲ ପ୍ରକାର ଏବଂ AutoCAD ରିଲିଜ ବାଛି ଏବଂ ଏହାକୁ ଡାଉନଲୋଡ କରି ଆପଣଙ୍କ ଡିଜାଇନରୁ ଏକ ଫ୍ଲୋର AutoCAD କୁ ଏକ୍ସପୋର୍ଟ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Import a 3D model into the designBring an external 3D model into your design as a 3D model object, or draw solid curved geometry with the slab tool instead.
- ଟ୍ରେସିଂ ବ୍ୟାକଗ୍ରାଉଣ୍ଡ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ AutoCAD ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ ଆମଦାନୀ କରନ୍ତୁDWG/DXF ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନକୁ ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନରେ ଟ୍ରେସିଂ ବ୍ୟାକଗ୍ରାଉଣ୍ଡ ଭାବରେ ଆଣନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଆପଣ CAD ଚିତ୍ର ଉପରେ ଟ୍ରେସ କରିପାରିବେ।
- DWG CAD ଫାଇଲଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଡିଜାଇନରେ ଆମଦାନୀ କରନ୍ତୁDWG ଅପଲୋଡ୍ ବିକଳ୍ପ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଏକ DWG CAD ଫାଇଲକୁ ଡିଜାଇନରେ ଆଣନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଦ୍ୱାରା ଆପଣ ବିଦ୍ୟମାନ CAD ଚିତ୍ରରୁ ପ୍ଲାନକୁ ଟ୍ରେସ୍ କିମ୍ବା ନିର୍ମାଣ କରିପାରିବେ।
- Merge two separate walls by deleting one and trimming or extending the otherDelete one of the two walls and trim or extend the remaining wall so it spans the full run, applying a custom thickness to match an existing wall.
- Place cabinets in floor plan for correct positioningPlace cabinets in the floor plan so they snap to adjacent cabinets, and rotate them with the space bar.
- Set wall height and thickness before adding doors and windowsSet the wall height and thickness, then define doors and windows by their height, width, thickness and elevation.
- Understand what each design level shows and hidesLearn how World, Building, Floor and Room levels scope the canvas and what disappears when you switch.
- ତଳ ଯୋଜନା 2D ରେ ଏବଂ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତର 3D ରୁମ୍ ସ୍ତରରେ ଦେଖନ୍ତୁତଳ ଯୋଜନା ଦେଖିବା ପାଇଁ 2D ମୋଡକୁ ସୁଇଚ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ଅବରୋଧକାରୀ କାନ୍ଥଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଲୁଚାଯାଇ ଛାତ ଦୃଶ୍ୟମାନ ଥାଇ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତର ଦେଖିବା ପାଇଁ 3D ରେ ରୁମ୍ ସ୍ତର ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Add a ceiling and set up a false ceilingDraw a ceiling outline in the 2D sketcher, then adjust its elevation, thickness and material and add a false ceiling shape beneath it.
- Add a ceiling by picking inside the room and applyingCreate a ceiling from the floor plan and adjust its elevation and thickness on the ceiling itself.
- Add and edit beams with the Architecture Beam toolPlace beams one click at a time on the floor plan, then select a placed beam to edit its dimensions, rotation, shift, material or delete it.
- ସିଲ୍ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଉଠାଣ ସହିତ ୱିଣ୍ଡୋ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଆକାର ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁଦ୍ୱାର ପରି ୱିଣ୍ଡୋ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ସିଲ୍ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଉଠାଣ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଦେଖାଯାଉଥିବା ମାପ ଉପରେ କ୍ଲିକ୍ କରି ସିଧାସଳଖ ଡ୍ରଇଂ ଉପରେ ୱିଣ୍ଡୋର ଆକାର ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଭୂତଳ ମହଲା ଯୋଜନା ଦୃଶ୍ୟରୁ ସ୍ଥାପତ୍ୟ ସ୍ତମ୍ଭ ଏବଂ ବିମ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଭୂତଳ ମହଲା ଯୋଜନା ଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ କାମ କରି ଏବଂ ସ୍ଥାପତ୍ୟ ବିକଳ୍ପଗୁଡ଼ିକରୁ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ବାଛି ସ୍ଥାପତ୍ୟ ସ୍ତମ୍ଭ ଏବଂ ବିମ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- Add electrical and plumbing markings directly in InferniaCreate electrical and plumbing markings inside Infernia instead of using separate software, placing points such as outlets and numbering points at the exact locations you specify.
- ରୁମ୍ ସ୍ତରରେ ଆର୍କିଟେକ୍ଚର୍ରୁ ଟାଇଲ୍ ଏବଂ ସିଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଆର୍କିଟେକ୍ଚର୍ ବିଭାଗରୁ ଟାଇଲ୍ ଏବଂ ସିଲିଂ ଲଗାଇ ଏକ ରୁମ୍ ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ସିଲିଂକୁ ଆପଣଙ୍କ କାନ୍ଥ ସହିତ ମେଳ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଟାଇଲ୍ସକୁ TI ସର୍ଟକଟ୍ ସହିତ ଏବଂ ଛାତକୁ Architecture ମେନୁ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଟାଇଲିଂ ଟୁଲ୍ କିମ୍ବା ସର୍ଟକଟ୍ T I Enter ସହିତ ଏକ କୋଠରୀରେ ଟାଇଲ୍ସ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକର ଗଭୀରତା, ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନ, ଆକାର ଏବଂ ଗ୍ରାଉଟ୍ ଲାଇନ୍ କଷ୍ଟମାଇଜ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ Architecture ମେନୁରୁ ଏକ ଛାତ ରଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Build false ceilings from 2D rectangles and extrusionsCreate a false ceiling from 2D rectangles and extrusions, then add and adjust lighting types individually.
- ଏକ ୱିଣ୍ଡୋକୁ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରରେ ରଖନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସଠିକ୍ କାନ୍ଥ ଦୂରତା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ କାନ୍ଥର ମଧ୍ୟଭାଗରେ ଏକ ୱିଣ୍ଡୋ ରଖନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାକୁ କାନ୍ଥମାନଙ୍କଠାରୁ ସଠିକ୍ ଦୂରତା ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ।
- Choose floor or room level for interior workPick the floor level for a full floor plan or the room level for work inside a single room.
- Close walls into a room and edit wall propertiesClose walls into a room, name it, and adjust wall height and thickness from the properties panel.
- ମୂଳ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପଦକ୍ଷେପ: କାନ୍ଥ, ଦ୍ୱାର, ଝରକା, ଛାତ ଏବଂ ଟାଇଲିଂଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ କରିବା ପାଇଁ କାନ୍ଥ ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତୁ, ଦ୍ୱାର ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ଝରକା ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ଛାତ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- Create a false ceiling with a peripheral dropModel a false ceiling with a visible peripheral drop and a central island using layered rectangles.
- Create a room by adding walls, openings, ceiling and tiles in sequenceClose the walls fully so the ceiling tool detects the room area and measures the ceiling automatically, then view and edit the room in 3D.
- Create a slab in 3D from a 2D slab outlineDraw a slab outline in 2D, then set its elevation, thickness and tile finish in 3D.
- କାନ୍ଥର ମୋଟେଇ ଦେଇ ଏକ୍ସଟ୍ରୁଡ୍ କରି ଦ୍ୱାର କିମ୍ବା ଝରକା କଟଆଉଟ୍ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁକଟ୍ କ୍ଷେତ୍ର ଆଙ୍କି ଏବଂ ତାହାକୁ କାନ୍ଥର ମୋଟେଇ ଦେଇ ଏକ୍ସଟ୍ରୁଡ୍ କରି କାନ୍ଥରେ ଏକ ଦ୍ୱାର କିମ୍ବା ଝରକା ପାଇଁ ଖୋଲା ସ୍ଥାନ କାଟନ୍ତୁ।
- Create false ceiling drops with extrude and offsetBuild peripheral and island false ceilings using the extrude and create-false-ceiling tools.
- Create island and peripheral false ceilings with offset and front shiftCreate island and peripheral false ceilings, and set thickness and front shift on a peripheral ceiling to leave a gap for strip lighting.
- Disable default railing on a staircase to remove railingsTurn off the default railing on a selected staircase so its railings are removed.
- ତଳ ସ୍ତରରେ କାନ୍ଥ ଏବଂ ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତୁକାନ୍ଥ ଏବଂ ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ କେଉଁ ସ୍ତରରେ ଆଙ୍କିବାକୁ ହେବ, ଏବଂ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ ପାଇଁ କେଉଁ ସ୍ତର ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଗମନାଗମନ କରିବେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Duplicate a placed wardrobe with Ctrl+C and Ctrl+VCopy a placed wardrobe unit and paste it into the remaining space, then drag units behind each other to adjust positioning.
- Edit a staircase and its steps and sectionsSelect a staircase to open its panel and adjust its drawing layer, dimensions, railings, steps and sections.
- Fix a floor slab that disappears when you hide the ceiling slabLearn why hiding the ceiling slab also hides the floor slab, since ceiling and floor slabs are both RCC slabs.
- Import 3D models and export GLTF with KHR extensionsBring .obj, .blend, .glb or .skp models into your design and export GLTF files with KHR extensions.
- ଛାତ ଏବଂ ପ୍ରପ୍ସ ପାଇଁ କାଟାଲଗ କିମ୍ବା ପ୍ଲେସମେଣ୍ଟ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ 3D ମଡେଲ ଆମଦାନୀ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ବାହ୍ୟ 3D ମଡେଲକୁ ଅପଲୋଡ କରି ଏବଂ କାଟାଲଗରେ ପ୍ରକାଶ କରି କିମ୍ବା ସିଧାସଳଖ ସ୍ଥାପନ କରି ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନରେ ଆଣନ୍ତୁ।
- ବିଲଡିଂ, ମହଲା, କୋଠରୀ ଏବଂ ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଗମନାଗମନ କରନ୍ତୁଜ୍ୟାମିତି ସମ୍ପାଦନା ନକରି ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ସ୍ଥାନ ବଦଳାଇବା ପାଇଁ navigation toolbar ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Place and move loft units via Furnish and the move toolPlace loft units from Kitchen Furniture, move them with the arrow options or the move tool, and add or resize box lofts as needed.
- Place beams and columns inside a room and edit their profileAdd a beam or column inside a room, change its cross-section and reposition it accurately.
- Place beams and columns, then adjust width, depth and heightPlace a beam or column in the model and adjust its width and depth from the panel.
- Place beams and columns with their toolsAdd beams and columns with their respective tools, setting a column's height to the wall height and a beam's height and elevation.
- Place ceiling lights and adjust point light and spotlight intensityPlace a ceiling light from the light options menu and adjust its point light and spotlight intensity after placement.
- Place windows by drag-and-click using the pink triangle centre pointPlace windows with the drag-and-click method, then adjust their materials and properties such as elevation.
- Recreate a wrong ceiling and add doors with opening directionDelete an incorrect ceiling, create a fresh one, and add doors to your plan.
- Resize a column using edit profile or the void column toolChange a column's size and height with edit profile, then place beams the same way.
- ଉଚ୍ଚତା କ୍ଷେତ୍ର ସହିତ ୱିଣ୍ଡୋର ସିଲ୍ ସ୍ତର ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁସାଇଟରେ ମାପାଯାଇଥିବା ସିଲ୍ ସ୍ତରକୁ ଉଚ୍ଚତା କ୍ଷେତ୍ରରେ ପ୍ରବେଶ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ୱିଣ୍ଡୋ ସଠିକ୍ ଉଚ୍ଚତାରେ ରହିବ।
- ୱାଲ୍ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ମାଇନସ୍ ସିଲିଂ ମୋଟେଇକୁ ଫଲ୍ ସିଲିଂ ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ଭାବରେ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଫଲ୍ ସିଲିଂର ଆକୃତି ଓ ମୋଟେଇ ନିର୍ଧାରଣ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ସିଲିଂ ୱାଲ୍ ଉପର ଭାଗର ଠିକ୍ ତଳେ ରହିବା ପାଇଁ ଏହାର ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ୱାଲ୍ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ମାଇନସ୍ ସିଲିଂ ମୋଟେଇ ଭାବରେ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Set the gap between true ceiling and false ceiling when extrudingUse extrude depth for the false ceiling thickness and front shift for how far it hangs below the true ceiling.
- Set up a floor's name, extent, tracing background and base in the floor menuOpen the Floor icon at the bottom left of the design portal to set the floor's name, extent, tracing background, floor base and export, and add Floor Outlines once the building has two or more floors.
- Show room dimensions and rename rooms on the planTurn on the Label / Show option in a room's properties so its dimensions appear on the plan, and rename rooms from the same area or by clicking inside them.
- Start a new design from a blank room or a preset roomStart a new design and choose either a blank room or one of the preset small rooms to begin from scratch.
- Switch between building, floor and room viewsSwitch between the building view and the floor view, and select a specific room to view.
- Understand the wall location line and how typed dimensions are measuredLearn how the location line places wall thickness and which face your typed dimensions are measured from.
- Use a DWG file for 2D plan tracingUse a DWG file's 2D plan, for example to trace walls.
- Work with building blocks, floor levels and rooms from the layoutCreate building blocks and floor levels in a project, then lay out a floor and define its rooms from that layout.
- Work with levels as real-world floorsLevels in Infurnia reflect real-world floors so you can model multi-floor projects.
- Add a building with New Blank Building or Copy BuildingOpen the buildings dropdown's '+ Add Building' panel to create a new blank building or copy an existing one, then manage buildings from the world menu.
- Add a column on the plan with Architecture > ColumnsPlace a column on the plan with one click and set its profile, dimensions, material and skirting in the Profile Column panel.
- Add a door to a wallPlace a door on a wall from the Architecture or Home tab and set it up in the Door panel.
- Add a furniture unit again after going backGo back, select a unit and add it again to place furniture in your design.
- Add a light from the furniture light sectionAdd a light from the furniture light section, then set its position and orientation.
- Add a new floor by copying or starting blankAdd another storey from the current floor level using the add-floor option.
- Add a roof and a tiling zone with the 2D sketcherDraw a roof outline and a tiling area in the 2D sketcher, then adjust the roof's settings in its panel.
- Add a slab and set its shape, elevation, thickness and materialDraw a slab outline in the 2D sketcher, apply it, then select the slab to adjust its shape, elevation, thickness or material.
- Add a window in the floor planPlace a window in a wall and set its size and elevation before you click.
- Add base, wall and tall units from the kitchen furniture catalogMark the room as a kitchen so the base, wall and tall units under kitchen furniture in Insert / Furnish are easier to access.
- Add columns and beams using the cuboidal column optionLearn the two column types available, normal profile column and cuboidal column, before placing columns and beams.
- Add kitchen cabinets from floor plan at room levelChoose a kitchen category and subcategory, pick the unit type, and place it in the room.
- Add kitchen units from the furnish library at the correct levelPlace kitchen units from the furnish library while working at the kitchen level so they land at the right height.
- Adjust each light's height individuallySet each light's Y-axis position on its own, since every item's X, Y and Z position differs and bulk adjustment is not possible.
- Apply a strip light to a panelPlace a yellow strip light in the 3D model.
- Apply flooring to a room and add an RCC slab using the slab toolChange the flooring pattern or material of a room afterwards.
- Avoid overlapping entities by adjusting dimensionsClick a placed element to see its dimensions and adjust them directly so it does not push into another element.
- Change a door model and position it by editing its dimensionSelect the door tool to see its height, width, thickness and model in the properties bar.
- Change a wall's length by editing its dimension valueSelect a wall and type a new dimension value to redraw it as a straight wall at the length you set.
- Change drawing units with UN and set room type for furnishingSwitch drawing units and decimals with UN, then rename each room and assign a room type so the right furnishing modules are offered.
- ମିଲିମିଟର ଏବଂ ଫୁଟ/ଇଞ୍ଚ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ପ୍ରକଳ୍ପ ଏକକ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରକଳ୍ପକୁ ପୁନଃ ସୃଷ୍ଟି ନକରି ବର୍ତ୍ତମାନ ପ୍ରକଳ୍ପର କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ ଏକକ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Change wall, door and window properties from the Modify menuAdjust wall dimensions and colours, door and window sizes, window height and elevation, and swap window models from the Modify menu.
- Click a placed door to generate its dimensionsClick a placed door to automatically generate its dimensions for editing.
- Combine multiple designs by copy-pasting all elements into one designCopy all elements from each design into a single design so the combined layout lives in one place.
- Copy a floor with its rooms and unitsDuplicate an existing floor so its rooms, names and units carry over to a new floor level.
- Create and edit rooms from enclosed wallsEnclose four walls to get an automatic floor and room text, then rename the room and change its text properties.
- ଅଫସେଟ୍ କପି କିମ୍ବା ମୁଭ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ପେରିଫେରାଲ୍ ବନାମ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ଫଲ୍ସ ସିଲିଂ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁଛାତ ଉପରେ ଏକ ଫଲ୍ସ ସିଲିଂ ଆୟତକ୍ଷେତ୍ର ମଡେଲ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ପେରିଫେରାଲ୍ ସୀମା ପାଇଁ ଅଫସେଟ୍ କପି କିମ୍ବା କେନ୍ଦ୍ରୀୟ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ପାଇଁ ମୁଭ୍ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ।
- Create staircases from the architecture staircase optionCreate a staircase on a floor level by choosing a stair type, setting its parameters and drafting it in plan.
- Customise room annotation text and show or hide room areaEdit the room annotation label from its settings, change its font size and font type, and show or hide elements such as the room area.
- Tab ସହିତ ସ୍ନାପ ପ୍ରାର୍ଥୀ ଚକ୍ର କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ କାନ୍ଥ ଚୟନ କରନ୍ତୁଚିତ୍ର କରିବା ସମୟରେ ସ୍ନାପ ପ୍ରାର୍ଥୀ ଚକ୍ର କରିବାକୁ Tab ଏବଂ Shift+Tab ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ଚୟନିତ କାନ୍ଥ ଉପରେ Tab ଦବାଇ ସମଗ୍ର କୋଠରୀ ରୂପରେଖ ଧରନ୍ତୁ।
- Cycle wall location line, staircase side and window position with SpacebarPress the spacebar while drawing or moving walls, staircases and windows to cycle their location line, drawing side or position.
- ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ ଅବିଚ୍ଛିନ୍ନ ରନ୍ ଭାବରେ କାନ୍ଥ ଡ୍ରାଫ୍ଟ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ କାନ୍ଥ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରରେ ଦ୍ୱାର ରଖନ୍ତୁପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ କାନ୍ଥକୁ ଏକ ଅବିଚ୍ଛିନ୍ନ ରନ୍ ଭାବରେ ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ କାନ୍ଥ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରକୁ ସ୍ନାପ୍ କରି ତା ଉପରେ ଦ୍ୱାର ରଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Draw a wall at an exact length and chain the next wallPoint in the wall's direction, type its length to open a length box, and press Enter so the wall is drawn at exactly that length and the next wall starts from its end.
- Draw a wall from start point to end pointClick the wall's start point, then set its end point by clicking the canvas or typing a length, and close a room by returning to the first start point.
- Draw ceilings, tiling and strip lights in the 2D sketcherOpen the 2D sketcher to draw ceilings, tiling and strip lights with Pick, line, arc, circle, rectangle and polygon tools, then apply the result.
- Draw electrical and plumbing layouts on the reflected ceiling planSet up line properties and multi-select elements so electrical and plumbing layouts, including 3D props such as fans, appear correctly on the reflected ceiling plan.
- Draw walls in the 2D floor plan with exact dimensionsDraw walls in the 2D floor plan by entering height and thickness, then clicking and typing exact lengths.
- Edit door dimensions by shift method or double-clicking the blue valueMove a door with its Shift row or double-click the blue dimension value to resize it.
- Edit in 2D and see changes in 3DMake changes in the 2D floor plan and watch them appear immediately in the 3D view, placing beams and columns in 2D first.
- Edit wall interiors at room levelWork on the interiors of the wall at room level, rotate the room and view the wall height.
- Enter and leave a room from the level selectorSelect a room to work inside it and switch back to floor level when you are done.
- Enter a room from the top navigation bar room selectorPick a room in the room selector next to the ground-level control to enter it and hide the walls and elements that are not part of it.
- Find furniture in a room's Furnish menu by room typeOpen a room's own view to see Furnish menu sections that match that room's type, such as Kitchen Furniture for a kitchen or Bedroom Furniture for a bedroom.
- Find items you cannot see by checking your levelCheck which level you are on, switch to the ground floor or the relevant floor, and remember that being inside a room hides elements outside it.
- Fix a room tag that does not appearClose any gap or collision between walls so the room is properly enclosed and its room tag appears.
- AI ଫ୍ଲୋରପ୍ଲାନ ଦ୍ୱାରା ଛାଡ଼ିଯାଇଥିବା ଛୋଟ କାନ୍ଥ ଓ ବାଲକୋନିଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଠିକ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ପ୍ଲାନ ତିଆରି କରିବା ପରେ, AI ଚିହ୍ନଟ କରିନଥିବା ଛୋଟ କାନ୍ଥ ଓ ବାଲକୋନିଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ କିମ୍ବା ଠିକ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Format room labels: font size, font type, bold, italics and colourChange a room label's font size, font type, bold, italics and colour from the room properties, and show the room area when you need it.
- Furnish a kitchen with base units, wall units, lofts and countertopsDraft the floor plan with measurements, doors and windows, then place base units, add wall units and lofts, and attach countertops to the cabinets that need them.
- AI floorplan generator ସହିତ ଏକ floor plan ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁଏକ input ରୁ ଏକ ମିନିଟ୍ ଭିତରେ floor plan ପ୍ରସ୍ତୁତ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଅତି ଛୋଟ ଲମ୍ବର କାନ୍ଥ ଏବଂ ବାଲକୋନିଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ହାତରେ ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରି ସଂଶୋଧନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Get an overview of the Infurnia modulesSee how the design, render, production and pricing modules fit together, starting with the architecture tools for walls, doors, windows, ceiling, tiling, staircase, slab, column, railings, beam and roof.
- How ceilings and floors reference wallsLearn that a ceiling and floor in the design module can be created using a wall as a reference.
- How information modeling differs from AutoCAD and SketchUpLearn how every element placed in the design, including walls, carries associated information such as dimensions, properties and parameters.
- କୋଠରୀର ଆକାର କିପରି ମାପ କରାଯାଏକେଉଁ କାନ୍ଥ ପୃଷ୍ଠରୁ କୋଠରୀର ଆକାର ମାପ କରାଯାଏ ଏବଂ ମାପ ସନ୍ଦର୍ଭ କିପରି ବଦଳାଇବେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- How rooms are auto-numbered and renamed with labelsLearn how the software names each space Room 1, Room 2, Room 3 and so on as you add rooms to a design.
- Identify loose furniture as a 3D model with an O labelRecognise that loose furniture such as a bed is a non-modular 3D model that carries an O label rather than a cabinet label.
- Import a 2D CAD drawing or image to trace the floor planTrace an imported 2D CAD drawing or image into a floor plan, using snap settings for accuracy.
- Insert base and wall units via FR shortcut and insert menuPlace a base unit from the insert menu, then add wall units with the FR enter shortcut and align them to walls.
- ଛାତ ଆଲୋକ ଭର୍ତ୍ତି କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ତୀବ୍ରତା, ରଙ୍ଗ ଓ ଝୁଲିବା ଅନୁପାତ ସଜାଡ଼ନ୍ତୁlight one ଏବଂ light two ଭାବରେ ଗୋଷ୍ଠୀଭୁକ୍ତ ଛାତ ଆଲୋକର ତୀବ୍ରତା ଓ ରଙ୍ଗ ସଜାଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- 3D ଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ ଏକ ୟୁନିଟ୍ ଅଲଗା କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ QC କୁ ଏକ ରୁମ୍କୁ ସୀମିତ କରନ୍ତୁକାନ୍ଥ ବାଧା ନ ଦେଇ ଏକ ୟୁନିଟ୍କୁ ନିକଟରୁ ନିରୀକ୍ଷଣ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏହାକୁ ନିଜସ୍ୱ ୱାର୍କ ସ୍କୋପ୍ ଦେଇ କେବଳ ଗୋଟିଏ ରୁମ୍ ପାଇଁ QC ଚଲାନ୍ତୁ।
- ଅନୁମତିପ୍ରାପ୍ତ ସର୍ବନିମ୍ନ କାନ୍ଥ ଲମ୍ବ 100 mm ଅଟେଯେତେବେଳେ ଆପଣ wall tool ସହିତ କାନ୍ଥ ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତି, ସିଷ୍ଟମ୍ ଗ୍ରହଣ କରୁଥିବା ସର୍ବନିମ୍ନ କାନ୍ଥ 100 mm ଅଟେ।
- Model a cove ceiling by offsetting and extruding an inner rectangleDraw an inner rectangle on the ceiling, offset it inward by about 100 mm, then extrude the offset section with a depth of 100 and a front shift of zero.
- Move a door or window to an exact distance from the wall sidePlace an opening centered on a wall, then use its side dimensions to set the exact distance from either side.
- Move and rotate kitchen units in the floor planPosition kitchen units correctly on walls by moving them with the MV command or move tool and rotating them with the spacebar.
- Front Shift ସହିତ ୱାଲ୍ ଡିଜାଇନ୍କୁ ୱାଲ୍ଠାରୁ ଦୂରକୁ ଘୁଞ୍ଚାନ୍ତୁଆପଣଙ୍କ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ୟୁନିଟ୍ରେ ଏକ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ଦ୍ୱାରା ୱାଲ୍-ମାଉଣ୍ଟେଡ୍ ଡିଜାଇନ୍କୁ ୱାଲ୍ ପୃଷ୍ଠର ସାମ୍ନାକୁ ଘୁଞ୍ଚାଇବା ପାଇଁ ଟାଇଲିଂ-କଟିଂ ଆକୃତିରେ Front Shift ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Move or resize a wall with the circular end handleClick the circular handle at one end of a wall and drag it to shorten, extend or reposition the wall.
- Name and type a room from its propertiesClick inside a closed room to open its properties, then rename it and pick a room type from the dropdown.
- Name a room and set its room typeClose a wall boundary into a room, then click its room label to give the room a name and a room type such as kitchen or bedroom.
- କାରଖାନା ଏବଂ କୋଟେସନ ଫିଲ୍ଟର କାମ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ରୁମ ଏବଂ ଫ୍ଲୋରକୁ ନାମ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁଏକ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରିବା ସମୟରେ ଏହାର ବିଲଡିଂ, ଫ୍ଲୋର ଏବଂ ରୁମ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଧାରଣ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ କାରଖାନା ଏବଂ କୋଟେସନ ଫିଲ୍ଟର କାମ କରିବ।
- Place a double-swing wardrobe using the FR commandCreate a new design from a room template, then use the FR command to place a double-swing wardrobe.
- Beams ଉପକରଣ ସହିତ ଏକ ବିମ୍ ସ୍ଥାପନ ଏବଂ ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁBeams ଉପକରଣ (BM) ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଗୋଟିଏ କ୍ଲିକ୍ରେ ଏକ ବିମ୍ ସ୍ଥାପନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ବାମ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ଏହାର ଆକାର, ସ୍ଥିତି ଏବଂ ସାମଗ୍ରୀ ସମାୟୋଜନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Place a window with configurable dimensionsPlace a window the same way you place a door, then set its dimensions to a standard size such as 800, 850 or 900.
- ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଏବଂ ଆକାର ଦ୍ୱାରା ସ୍ତମ୍ଭ ରଖନ୍ତୁଏକ ସ୍ତମ୍ଭର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଏବଂ ଆକାର ନିର୍ଧାରଣ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏହାକୁ ଏକ କାନ୍ଥ ଭିତରେ କିମ୍ବା ଏକ କୋଣରେ ରଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Place doors and windows from the floor planAdd doors and windows to built walls from the floor plan, then adjust their dimensions and parameters.
- Place openings away from walls, then set exact distance by typingMove an opening clear of the wall in 2D and then type its exact distance instead of dragging it.
- Plan furniture layout in 2D, not 3D, for easier snappingPlan furniture layout in the 2D space instead of the 3D space so snapping works and furniture stays where you put it.
- Raise an object above the floor in 3D room viewSwitch to the 3D room view, go inside the room, select the object and move it upward to raise it above the floor.
- Rename a room and change its type from room settingsOpen the room details from room settings to rename a room, change its type and adjust its label's font size, font type and font color.
- Rename a room and show or hide its area labelSet the area option to show or hide a room's area in the model space and choose the area format you prefer.
- Reposition the countertop and shape its front profileMove the countertop along the XYZ axes and shift and extend the front to indicate a profile.
- କ୍ୟୁବ୍ ସ୍ତମ୍ଭ ସହିତ ଏକ ସ୍ତମ୍ଭକୁ ମୁକ୍ତ ଭାବରେ ଆକାର ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁଆକାର ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରିବାକୁ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହେଲେ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ୍ ସ୍ତମ୍ଭକୁ କ୍ୟୁବ୍ ସ୍ତମ୍ଭ ସହିତ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ଏହାର ଆକୃତି ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ନଥିଲେ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ୍ ସ୍ତମ୍ଭକୁ ହଟାନ୍ତୁ।
- Resize or remove a sink from the selection treeChange a sink's height, width and depth, or remove it entirely, using the furniture light unit in the selection tree.
- ଏହାର ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ୍ ସମ୍ପାଦନା କରି ଏକ ସ୍ତମ୍ଭକୁ ଘୂର୍ଣ୍ଣନ କରନ୍ତୁଏହାର ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ୍ ସମ୍ପାଦନା କରି ଏବଂ ଘୂର୍ଣ୍ଣିତ ଦିଗରେ ଏହାକୁ ପୁନଃ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଧାରଣ କରି ସ୍ତମ୍ଭର ଦିଗ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Rotate elements and edit column profilesRotate elements with the spacebar and edit column profiles through the profile edit feature.
- Segregate open spaces into rooms with a room dividerUse a room divider to split an open-plan space into distinct functional rooms without adding physical walls.
- Set a room's name and type so the right furniture appearsName each room and give it a type so Insert > Furnish shows only the furniture and accessories that match it.
- Room Settings ରେ ଏକ ରୁମ୍ର ପ୍ରକାର ଏବଂ ନାମ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁRoom Settings > Type ରୁ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ରୁମ୍କୁ ଏହାର ସଠିକ୍ ପ୍ରକାର ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ, ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ ଯେ ଏକ ନୂଆ ରୁମ୍ ଆପଣ ଏହାକୁ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ ନକରିବା ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ 'Room <n>' ନାମରେ ଏବଂ Balcony ପ୍ରକାରରେ ଆରମ୍ଭ ହୁଏ।
- Set room dimensions from center or inner walls and pick room typeSwitch room dimensions to inner-wall measurements and choose a room type so Insert and Furnish only offers matching furniture and accessories.
- Set room inner dimensions and wall height before designingSet the left wall height and thickness and name the room so it is identifiable in the project before you start designing.
- ପ୍ରସ୍ତାବରେ ରୋଷେଇଘର ଫର୍ନିଚର ପାଇବା ପାଇଁ ରୁମ୍ ପ୍ରକାରକୁ ରୋଷେଇଘର ଭାବରେ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁରୋଷେଇଘର ୟୁନିଟ୍ ରଖିବା ସମୟରେ ରୁମ୍ ପ୍ରକାରକୁ ରୋଷେଇଘର ଭାବରେ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ପ୍ରସ୍ତାବଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ ରୋଷେଇଘର ଫର୍ନିଚର ଏବଂ ସହାୟକ ସାମଗ୍ରୀ ଦେଖାଯିବ।
- ଏକ ମହଲାର ତଳ ସ୍ତର ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁମହଲାର ବିସ୍ତାର ସଠିକ୍ ସ୍ତରରୁ ଆରମ୍ଭ ହେବା ପାଇଁ Floor left menu ରୁ ମହଲାର ତଳ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ତଳ ଟାଇଲ ଫାଙ୍କ ଉପରେ ୱାଲ ୟୁନିଟର ତଳ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁଆଧାର ୟୁନିଟଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଶୂନ ସ୍ତରରୁ 12 mm ଉପରେ କାହିଁକି ରହେ ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ୱାଲ ୟୁନିଟର ତଳ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ମାନକ 1450 mm ଉପରେ 12 mm ସେଟ ହୁଏ।
- ପ୍ରିସେଟ୍ କିମ୍ବା ଏକ କଷ୍ଟମ୍ ମୂଲ୍ୟରୁ କାନ୍ଥ ମୋଟେଇ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରିସେଟ୍ କାଟାଲଗ୍ ବିକଳ୍ପଗୁଡ଼ିକରୁ ଏକ କାନ୍ଥର ସମାପ୍ତ ସାମଗ୍ରୀ ମୋଟେଇ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ କିମ୍ବା ନିଜର କଷ୍ଟମ୍ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ଟାଇପ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Set wall unit height from floor via Y positionPlace a wall unit at a standard height by setting its Y-axis value to the unit's bottom height above finished floor level plus the tile offset.
- ଏଲିଭେସନ ଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ ଏକ ସିଡ଼ି ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁଡ୍ର ଟୁଲ ସହିତ ହାତରେ ଆଙ୍କି ଏଲିଭେସନରେ ଏକ ସିଡ଼ି ଉପସ୍ଥାପନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Show countertops and sinks in floor plans via custom plan cutting planeCreate a new custom plan and set the cutting plane height so countertops draw with continuous lines and sinks appear in the floor plan.
- ଏକ ଉପାଦାନ ସ୍ଥାପନ କରିବା ସମୟରେ କାନ୍ଥର କେନ୍ଦ୍ର ସୂଚକ ଚିହ୍ନଟ କରନ୍ତୁକର୍ସର କାନ୍ଥର ଠିକ୍ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରରେ ପହଞ୍ଚିଲେ ଗୋଲାପୀ କ୍ରସ୍ ଏକ ଗୋଲାପୀ ତ୍ରିଭୁଜରେ ପରିଣତ ହେବା ଏବଂ ଦୂରକୁ ଗଲେ ପୁଣି ଫେରିଆସିବା ଦେଖନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ ଡ୍ରାଗ୍ ହୋଇଥିବା ୱିଣ୍ଡୋ ତାର କାନ୍ଥ ଉପରେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରିତ ହେବା ସମୟ ଜଣାନ୍ତୁଏକ ଚୟନିତ ୱିଣ୍ଡୋକୁ ତାର କାନ୍ଥ ସାଙ୍ଗରେ ଡ୍ରାଗ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହା କେବେ କେନ୍ଦ୍ରିତ ଅବସ୍ଥାରେ ଅଛି ଜାଣିବା ପାଇଁ ଗୋଲାପୀ ମାର୍କରଗୁଡ଼ିକ ପଢ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- ତଳ ପୃଷ୍ଠଭୂମି ଭାବରେ ଯୋଡ଼ାଯାଇଥିବା DWG କିମ୍ବା ସ୍କେଲ କରାଯାଇଥିବା ଚିତ୍ର ଉପରେ କାନ୍ଥ ଟ୍ରେସ କରନ୍ତୁତଳ ଟ୍ରେସିଂ ପୃଷ୍ଠଭୂମି ଭାବରେ ଏକ DWG ଫାଇଲ କିମ୍ବା ସ୍କେଲ କରାଯାଇଥିବା ଚିତ୍ର ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ସ୍ଥାପତ୍ୟ କାନ୍ଥ ଉପକରଣ ସହିତ ଏହା ଉପରେ କାନ୍ଥ ଟ୍ରେସ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Trim an extra wall or room-divider segmentRemove an extra wall or room-divider segment using the trim shortcut T R or the trim option in the on-screen menu.
- Understand how the Slab tool creates free-standing geometryLearn that a slab always comes in at the top and can be dropped down to the floor.
- Understand W, D and Height on a beamLearn what W, D and Height measure on a beam and how typing new values changes its length and plan width.
- Understand where light is emitted from a fixtureLearn that a fixture's light comes from its yellow spheres rather than its body, with two default light sources giving comparable illumination to the upper and lower halves of the room.
- Understand why a cabinet straddling a room boundary is missing at room levelLearn why a cabinet that sits only partly inside a room and whose centre point falls outside the room boundary is not listed at room level.
- Understand why imported 3D models cannot be edited like native wallsLearn why a 3D model built outside Infernia is not recognised as a native Infernia wall and cannot be edited the same way.
- Upload DWG files or images as tracing backgrounds in floor settingsUpload a DWG file or an image in floor settings to use it as a tracing background.
- Use a floor reference to trace uploaded images or DWG dimensionsUpload an image or DWG dimensions and use them as a background reference for tracing within the design.
- କାନ୍ଥ, ଫର୍ନିଚର ଏବଂ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ିବା ପାଇଁ କୀବୋର୍ଡ ସର୍ଟକଟ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁଫର୍ନିଚର ଯୋଡ଼ିବା, କାନ୍ଥ ଆଙ୍କିବା, ଟାଇଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ିବା କିମ୍ବା ଦ୍ୱାର ରଖିବା ଭଳି ସାଧାରଣ କମାଣ୍ଡଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଏକ ଛୋଟ କୋଡ୍ ଟାଇପ୍ କରି ଏବଂ Enter ଦବାଇ ଟ୍ରିଗର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- କାନ୍ଥ ଆଙ୍କିବା ସମୟରେ ଦିଶା ଲକ୍ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ସ୍ପେସବାର୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଆରମ୍ଭ ବିନ୍ଦୁରୁ ସିଧା କାନ୍ଥ ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ କମିଟ୍ କରିବା ପୂର୍ବରୁ ଘୁଞ୍ଚାଇବା ସମୟରେ ଏହାର ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ ମାପ ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Use the pick tool to select internal wall faces for ceilings and tilingPick internal wall faces to sketch a ceiling and apply tiling, then adjust tile material, pattern, size and grout appearance room by room.
- Why base units sit 12 mm above the floorBase units are placed with a default Y position of 12 mm so floor tiles can be added later without shifting each unit up.
ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ, ଲେୟର ଏବଂ ଡ୍ରଇଂ ଟୁଲ167
- Change board size in board layout settings and apply to all boardsSet the board width and length in board layout settings so every board in the design uses the new size.
- Add manual dimensions and measure balance spacePlace dimensions by hand between touching elements and measure the leftover space around placed units.
- Copy, Multiply ଏବଂ Fixed Distance ବିକଳ୍ପଗୁଡ଼ିକ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଆକୃତିକୁ ନକଲ କରେପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଆକୃତିକୁ ଅଲଗା ଅଲଗା ଆଙ୍କିବା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତେ ଏକ ରେଖା କିମ୍ବା ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନ ସହିତ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଆକୃତିକୁ ପୁନରାବୃତ୍ତି କରିବା ପାଇଁ Copy, Multiply ଏବଂ Fixed Distance ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Create a groove by copying a shape and defining a cutDraw or select a shape, copy it at the required intervals, and define it as a cut groove with a specified depth so it can be included for CAM machining.
- Create custom grooves via panel edit panel designDraw a groove shape on a panel, set it as a cutout with depth and material, then repeat it at a fixed distance.
- Repeat a shape with the Repeat buttonRepeat a selected shape into multiple copies by setting a base point, start point and end point, then adjust or ungroup the repeater as needed.
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (167)
- ସ୍ପେସିଂ ଏବଂ ବେସ୍, ଆରମ୍ଭ ଓ ଶେଷ ପଏଣ୍ଟ ସହିତ repeat ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁଆବଶ୍ୟକ ସ୍ପେସିଂ ଏବଂ ପଏଣ୍ଟ ସହିତ repeat କମାଣ୍ଡ ଚଲାଇ ଏକ ରେଖା ବରାବର ପୁନରାବୃତ୍ତି ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁ, ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହେଲେ ଏକ ଫିଚରରୁ ଆରମ୍ଭକୁ ଅଫସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଆଙ୍କିବା ପୂର୍ବରୁ construction lines ସହିତ ରେଫରେନ୍ସ ଫାଙ୍କ ଚିହ୍ନଟ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ବିକଳ୍ପ ଭାବରେ ଦେଖାଇବା ପାଇଁ ଅତିରିକ୍ତ ପରିମାପକୁ ପାରାମିଟର ଭାବରେ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁParameter ଅଧୀନରେ ଫର୍ଣ୍ଣିଚରରେ ବିକଳ୍ପ ଭାବରେ ଉପଲବ୍ଧ କରିବାକୁ ଚାହୁଁଥିବା ଯେକୌଣସି ଅତିରିକ୍ତ ପରିମାପ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏହାକୁ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଫର୍ଣ୍ଣିଚର ଅପଡେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Add, rearrange and lock auto dimensionsAfter adding auto dimensions, fill in any missing ones with the dimension tool, rearrange them, then center and lock the view.
- Adjust dimension text height and arrow propertiesReduce the dimension text height value in the properties panel when dimensions appear too large.
- ଏକ ସ୍ଥାପିତ ଲାଇଟ୍ ଫିକ୍ସଚର ଭିତରେ ଥିବା ଆଲୋକ ଉତ୍ସଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସମାୟୋଜିତ କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଆଲୋକ ଉତ୍ସର ସ୍ଥିତି, ପ୍ରକାର, ତୀବ୍ରତା ଓ ରଙ୍ଗ ସେଟ୍ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଏକ ସ୍ଥାପିତ ଲାଇଟ୍ ଫିକ୍ସଚରର ନିଜସ୍ୱ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁ।
- କନଷ୍ଟ୍ରକ୍ସନ ଏବଂ position ଫିଲ୍ଡ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ଲକ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁ କିମ୍ବା ସ୍ଥାନାନ୍ତର କରନ୍ତୁ3D ରେ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ଲକ ଚୟନ କରି ଏବଂ ଏହାର position ଫିଲ୍ଡ ସମାୟୋଜିତ କରି ଏହାକୁ ସ୍ଥାନାନ୍ତର କରନ୍ତୁ, କାରଣ ଲକ ଏକ ସ୍ୱାଧୀନ ବସ୍ତୁ ନୁହେଁ ବରଂ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟର ଅଂଶ।
- Copy and paste elements between flats with Ctrl+C and Ctrl+VReuse an element such as a chimney duct in a second flat without re-importing and re-aligning it.
- Create and publish sweep profiles for reuse across designsReuse a decorative profile with the sweep tool by drawing a path, defining its cross-section, and publishing it so other designers can pick it from a dropdown.
- ଏକ ଏଲିଭେସନରେ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନ ଲାଇନ ଡିଲିଟ ଏବଂ ପୁନଃକ୍ରମ କରନ୍ତୁଆପଣଙ୍କର ଆଉ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ନଥିବା ଏକ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନ ଲାଇନ ହଟାନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଅଟୋ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନ ଲାଇନଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଆପଣ ଚାହୁଁଥିବା ଧାଡ଼ି କ୍ରମକୁ ଡ୍ରାଗ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ ସ୍ୱିପ୍ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ୍ ପାରାମିଟରାଇଜ୍ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଆଧାର ଆକୃତି ପଥ ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁସ୍ୱିପ୍ କିମ୍ବା ରିପିଟ୍ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ୍ର ଆରମ୍ଭ ବିନ୍ଦୁକୁ ପାରାମିଟ୍ରିକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ୍ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ସହିତ ଅପଡେଟ୍ ହେବ।
- Exclude element types and layers from auto dimensioningControl which elements get dimensioned through the design's elevation preferences and drawing layers.
- ଏକ ଏଲିଭେସନ ଦୃଶ୍ୟରୁ ଅନୁପସ୍ଥିତ ବସ୍ତୁଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଠିକ କରନ୍ତୁଏଲିଭେସନ ପସନ୍ଦରେ ଦୂରତା ମୂଲ୍ୟ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ ଯାହାଫଳରେ କାନ୍ଥ ନିକଟରେ ଥିବା ବସ୍ତୁଗୁଡ଼ିକ ୱାଲ ଏଲିଭେସନ ଚିତ୍ରରେ ଦେଖାଯିବ।
- Generate separate floor plans per cabinet type using view-specific layersGive each cabinet type its own plan so base, wall and loft units print separately.
- Get around the design interface: levels bar, plan/3D toggle and properties panelFind the levels bar, the floor plan and 3D toggle, the grouped toolbar, the properties panel and the presentation sheets in the design interface.
- Get to know the design interface toolbars and Home tabLearn which toolbar tabs the design interface offers and what the Home tab and toolbars support.
- ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ ଲେବଲଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଫର୍ଣ୍ଣିଚର/ଲାଇଟ୍ସ ଲେବଲ ଦୃଶ୍ୟମାନତା ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଲୁଚାନ୍ତୁଉଚ୍ଚତା ଦୃଶ୍ୟରୁ ସେମାନଙ୍କ ଟିପ୍ପଣୀ ଲେବଲଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ହଟାଇବା ପାଇଁ ଚୟନିତ ୟୁନିଟଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ ଲେବଲ ଦୃଶ୍ୟମାନତା ବନ୍ଦ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଡିଜାଇନଗୁଡ଼ିକ ପ୍ରକୃତ-ଜଗତ ସ୍ତର ଏବଂ ମିଲିମିଟର କିପରି ବ୍ୟବହାର କରେଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ ପ୍ରକୃତ-ଜଗତ ସ୍ତରରେ କିପରି ସଂରଚିତ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ ଉତ୍ପାଦନ ପାଇଁ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟ ୟୁନିଟ ଭାବରେ ମିଲିମିଟର କାହିଁକି ସେଟ କରାଯିବା ଉଚିତ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Import a floor plan with AI Floor plan and set its scaleUpload a floor plan, draw a line on the preview and type its real length in mm so walls, rooms, doors and windows are placed from the origin you click.
- Lock a customised view and add it to a presentationLock a customised view so it can be added directly to a presentation, knowing the lock applies only to that specific view.
- Move an object an exact distance using the translate panelMove a selected object by an exact distance by entering the amount in the translate panel's axis position field.
- Move items with 3D gimbalsSelect an item to show its three gimbals, then drag or type an axis value to move it.
- ଲଗଇନ ବିନା ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନର ଶେୟାର ଲିଙ୍କ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁଏକ ବ୍ରାଉଜରରେ ଲଗଇନ ବିନା ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନର ଶେୟାର ଲିଙ୍କ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଫ୍ଲୋର ସିଲେକ୍ଟର, Select Room, Floor Plan / 3D, Free View ଏବଂ ଏକ ମନ୍ତବ୍ୟ ବଟନ ସହିତ କେବଳ-ପଢ଼ିବା ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ଦେଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Repeat panels with multiply at fixed distance or multiply fixed copyRepeat a panel at a set spacing, or spread a fixed number of panels evenly across a wall.
- Rotate a cabinet and set its position and rotationTurn a selected cabinet with the space bar or an exact Y angle, rotate a panel's finish, and read Position Y correctly against bottom height.
- Select multiple objects with area select and delete themDrag across several objects with area select, then remove them with the keyboard Delete key or the delete action in the selection's left panel.
- Set the dimension line colour to a valid hex valueThe dimension line colour defaults to black (#000000), so enter a valid hex value to avoid mirror or blink visuals.
- Switch between 2D and 3D modes with changes kept in syncSwitch between floor plan (2D) mode and 3D mode and see your changes carried across in both directions.
- Toggle X-ray mode for cabinets with the XR shortcutToggle X-ray mode with the XR shortcut to inspect cabinet internals quickly, even across several selected cabinets at once.
- Turn on auto snapping to constrain walls to 90 degreesTurn on Orthogonal Snapping so the walls and lines you draw stay at 90 degrees, then join walls with Trim/Extend to Corner.
- XR shortcut କିମ୍ବା Construction menu ରୁ X-ray mode ଚାଲୁ କରନ୍ତୁXR shortcut, Construction menu କିମ୍ବା ବାମ ପାଖ menu ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଫର୍ଣ୍ଣିଚରକୁ X-ray mode କୁ ସୁଇଚ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Understand how layers come by default in InfurniaLearn that every item in Infurnia has a layer and that layers come by default.
- ସଠିକ୍ ଡ୍ରଇଂ ଲେୟାରରେ ଅଟୋ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରଥମେ ୟୁନିଟ୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ମେଳ ଖାଉଥିବା ପ୍ଲାନ୍ ଲେୟାରରେ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏକ ସମୟରେ ସମସ୍ତ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନ୍ ପୂରଣ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଅଟୋ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- ସଠିକ୍ ଦୂରତା ପାଇଁ ଟାଣିବା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତେ move tool (MV) ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁଟାଣିବା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତେ move tool ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଏକ ବସ୍ତୁକୁ ସଠିକ୍ ଦୂରତାକୁ ଘୁଞ୍ଚାନ୍ତୁ।
- Use X-ray mode via toggle when XR shortcut failsTurn on X-ray mode with X or the toggle when XR and Enter does nothing, then click a hinge or component to select it.
- View connectors in 3D using X-ray mode shortcut XR enterToggle X-ray mode on a selected cabinet to inspect its connectors in the 3D view, then return to normal selection.
- Add a compass to a floor planPlace a compass on the floor plan with Annotate > Compass and adjust it in the Compass panel.
- Add an independent railingDraw a railing's path in the 2D sketcher and then adjust it from the Railing panel.
- Add arrows, guidelines and text on a view using draw-over and annotateAdd arrows and text annotations to a view, then lock it so the annotations stay in place.
- Align dimension ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି କୋଠରୀ ପରେ କୋଠରୀ ମାପ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହା ଧାରରୁ ଧାର ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ମାପେAlign dimension ସହିତ ଏକ ସମୟରେ ଏକ କୋଠରୀ ମାପ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହା ଧାରରୁ ଧାର ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ମାପେ, ଏବଂ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଆପଣ ବାଛିଥିବା layer ଉପରେ ରଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Add free text with custom size and color instead of annotationsSet the size and color of free text before you place it, and give different text different colors.
- Add hatch, dimensions, text and arrow annotationsDraw a hatch rectangle, adjust its scale and apply it, then edit arrow head size, text size and text colour in the properties panel.
- Add rectangles with offsets and use copy multiply for repeatsAdd rectangles with the required offset and then use copy-multiply-straight-fixed-copy to create multiple copies in one step.
- Add text labels and arrow-head callouts with annotateAdd text labels and arrow-head callouts to a view so you can point out details in your scene.
- Add text labels to elements and delete them when no longer neededLabel what an element is with text, adjust its size and colour, and delete elements you no longer need.
- Assign annotations and leaders to the relevant layer for easy switchingLearn which layers text boxes and leader lines use by default and how to hide objects with the system hidden layer.
- ଚେଞ୍ଜ ଡ୍ରଇଂ ଲେୟର ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଚୟନିତ ଉପାଦାନଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଏକ ଲେୟରକୁ ନ୍ୟସ୍ତ କରନ୍ତୁଚେଞ୍ଜ ଡ୍ରଇଂ ଲେୟର ବିକଳ୍ପ ସହିତ ଚୟନିତ ବସ୍ତୁଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଏକ ଲେୟରକୁ ସ୍ଥାନାନ୍ତର କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟର customize ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ତାହାର ଲେୟର ନିଶ୍ଚିତ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Choose Draw or Annotate tools for shapes, notes and dimensionsLearn which floor plan editor tools draw geometry and which add text, dimensions and leader lines, and how to set annotation styles before placing them.
- ବସ୍ତୁ କପି କରିବା ସମୟରେ ସ୍ଥିର କପି କିମ୍ବା ସ୍ଥିର ଦୂରତା ବାଛନ୍ତୁଆପଣ ଡ୍ରାଗ୍ କରିବା ସମୟରେ କପିଗୁଡ଼ିକର ସଂଖ୍ୟା କିମ୍ବା ସେମାନଙ୍କ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଥିବା ବ୍ୟବଧାନ ସ୍ଥିର ରହିବ କି ନାହିଁ ନିର୍ଣ୍ଣୟ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Control layers per view separately from global layersSet each 3D, floor plan, elevation or section view to show only the layers you want, while global layers still control the overall model.
- Control what information is shown with drawing layersUse drawing layers to control what information is shown on a drawing.
- Copy and paste a unit with Ctrl+C and Ctrl+VCopy a unit and paste as many copies as you need, with the quotation/costing line generated automatically for each copy.
- Ctrl+C ଏବଂ Ctrl+V ସହିତ ଉପାଦାନଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ କପି ଏବଂ ପେଷ୍ଟ କରନ୍ତୁCtrl+C ଏବଂ Ctrl+V ସର୍ଟକଟ ସହିତ ଉପାଦାନଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ କପି ଏବଂ ପେଷ୍ଟ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ କାନ୍ଥ ଉପରେ ଦ୍ୱାର ଏବଂ ଝରକା ରଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Copy and paste units at drawing levelDuplicate units on the drawing with the standard copy-paste shortcut so similar units can be placed repeatedly without rebuilding them.
- ଅନ୍ୟ ମହଲାର ସମାନ ସ୍ଥାନକୁ ଏକ ବସ୍ତୁ କପି କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ବସ୍ତୁ କପି କରି ଏକ କିମ୍ବା ଅଧିକ ଅନ୍ୟ ମହଲାରେ ପେଷ୍ଟ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଏହା ସେଠାରେ ସମାନ ପ୍ଲାନ୍ ସ୍ଥାନରେ ପଡ଼ିବ।
- Copy ଏକ କପି ତିଆରି କରେ; multiply ପୁନରାବୃତ୍ତ କପି ତିଆରି କରେcopy ଟୁଲ୍ର copy ଏବଂ multiply ବିକଳ୍ପ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ପାର୍ଥକ୍ୟ ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଦ୍ୱାରା ଆପଣ ଏକ ଆକୃତିକୁ ଥରେ ନକଲ କରିପାରିବେ କିମ୍ବା ନିୟମିତ ବ୍ୟବଧାନରେ ପୁନରାବୃତ୍ତି କରିପାରିବେ।
- Copy objects with the multiply optionPlace a fixed number of copies of an object using the multiply option of the copy tool.
- Copy-paste places repeated copies until Escape is pressedDuplicate a placed unit with Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V, then keep clicking to place as many identical copies as you need.
- Create a custom plan from the three-dot menu next to 3D viewCreate a custom plan in the design portal and understand the cut depth it uses.
- Create a framing profile around a shape with offset copyDraw the outline with extrude line and three-point arc, then use offset copy to build a parallel framing profile around it.
- କଷ୍ଟମ ଲେୟର ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସେଥିରେ ଆଇଟମ ନ୍ୟସ୍ତ କରନ୍ତୁକଷ୍ଟମ ବିଭାଗରେ ନିଜର ଲେୟର ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଆଇଟମଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସେଥିରେ ସ୍ଥାନାନ୍ତର କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଏକସଙ୍ଗେ ଦେଖାଇ, ଲୁଚାଇ ଏବଂ ରଙ୍ଗ ଦେଇ ପାରିବେ।
- ପଥ ଏବଂ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ସହିତ ସ୍ୱିପ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନଯୁକ୍ତ ଟ୍ରିମ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁଟ୍ରିମର ଆଉଟଲାଇନକୁ ଏକ ପଥ ଭାବରେ ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନଯୁକ୍ତ ଟ୍ରିମ କିମ୍ବା ମୋଲ୍ଡିଂ ତିଆରି କରିବା ପାଇଁ ସେହି ପଥ ସହିତ ଏକ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ଆକୃତିକୁ ସ୍ୱିପ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Dimension point-to-point, line-to-line, or with auto dimensionsAdd point-to-point, line-to-line or automatic dimensions to your design and remove any you do not want.
- ମଲ୍ଟିପ୍ଲାଏ ସ୍ଟ୍ରେଟ୍ ଫିକ୍ସଡ୍ କପି ସହିତ ଆଲୋକଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସମାନ ଭାବରେ ବିତରଣ କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକଟିକୁ ହାତରେ ରଖିବା ବିନା ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ଦୂରତାରେ ଆଇଟମଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ କପି କରି ଏକ ରେଖା ସହିତ ପୁନରାବୃତ୍ତି ହେଉଥିବା ଆଲୋକ ଫିକ୍ସଚରଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ରଖନ୍ତୁ।
- ସ୍କେଚରରେ 3-point arc ବଟନ ସହିତ ଏକ ଚାପ ଆଙ୍କନ କରନ୍ତୁଏହାର ଆରମ୍ଭ, ଏହାର ଶେଷ, ତାପରେ ଏହା ଯେଉଁ ବିନ୍ଦୁ ଦେଇ ଯାଏ ସେଠାରେ କ୍ଲିକ କରି ଏକ ଚାପ ଆଙ୍କନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ତିନୋଟି ରେଖାକୁ ଏକ ବକ୍ର ଧାର ଥିବା ଆକୃତିରେ ବନ୍ଦ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Draw and configure hatching in the drawing viewAdd hatching to your drawing by drawing a boundary and applying it, then adjust its configuration and scale.
- Arc Drawing ମୋଡ୍ ସହିତ ବକ୍ର କାନ୍ଥ ଆଙ୍କନ କରନ୍ତୁDraw by Bending, Draw around Center କିମ୍ବା Draw along Tangent ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ବକ୍ର କାନ୍ଥ ଆଙ୍କନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ କାନ୍ଥର ବାମ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରୁ ରେଡିଅସ୍ ସମାୟୋଜିତ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ପ୍ଲାନ ଏବଂ ଏଲିଭେସନରେ ରେଫରେନ୍ସ ଆଇଟମ ଆଙ୍କନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଲେବଲ ଆନୋଟେଟ କରନ୍ତୁଡ୍ର ଟୁଲସ ସହିତ ରେଫରେନ୍ସ ଆଇଟମ ଆଙ୍କନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଆନୋଟେଟ ଟୁଲସ ସହିତ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଲେବଲ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏକ ଡ୍ରଇଂ ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ଅନୁସାରେ ଲେୟର ସେଟ ଅପ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Edit a placed unit's dimensions from the floor planSelect a placed unit in the floor plan and change its dimensions directly from the dimension fields so it updates immediately.
- ଏକ ରିପିଟରର ମୂଳ ଆକୃତି ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ରିପିଟର ଡିଲିଟ କରନ୍ତୁସମସ୍ତ କପିକୁ ଏକାସାଙ୍ଗରେ ବଦଳାଇବା ପାଇଁ ରିପିଟରର ମୂଳ ଆକୃତି ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁ, Back ସହିତ ଫେରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ମୂଳ ଆକୃତିକୁ ସାଧାରଣ ଆକୃତି ଭାବରେ ପୁନଃସ୍ଥାପିତ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ରିପିଟର ଡିଲିଟ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Edit a window after adding itSelect the window to open its Window panel and adjust its drawing layer, dimensions, shift, location, model, meshes and materials, or delete it.
- ମିଶ୍ରିତ ସ୍କେଚ୍ ଚୟନଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ Offset ମୋଡ୍ ପୁନଃବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁରେଖା ଏବଂ ବୃତ୍ତଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଏକସଙ୍ଗେ ଚୟନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ପ୍ରକାରର ଗୁଣଧର୍ମକୁ ନିଜର ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ବିଭାଗରେ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ ଯେ Offset ଉପକରଣ ଆପଣ ଶେଷ ଥର ବାଛିଥିବା Copy କିମ୍ବା Move ମୋଡ୍ ରଖେ।
- Enable Rotate by switching to 3D viewEnter 3D mode from the navbar so the greyed-out Rotate tool becomes available.
- Find modelling tools and properties in the Home tabUse the Home tab to reach frequently used modelling tools and the properties bar to view and edit whatever you click in the 3D scene.
- Find the navigation bar, tool tabs and toolbar in the workspaceLearn the order of the workspace from top to bottom so you know where the navigation bar, tool tabs and the selected tab's toolbar sit.
- Find the Rotate tool and what it doesLocate the Rotate control and use it to turn an object around an axis.
- Find tools on the Home toolbar and the other tabsLearn which frequently used tools sit on the Home button and where the remaining tools live across the Architecture, Draw, Insert, Annotate, View, Render and Outputs tabs.
- Fix a red bounding box that shows overlap after snappingUnderstand why a red bounding box can appear even when units snap correctly.
- Fix the non-zero area error when adding a slab, ceiling, roof, rail or tilingSlab, Add Ceiling, Roof, Rail and Tiling all open the 2D sketcher, where you draw a closed shape before applying.
- Flip face to see shapes drawn on the other sideSwitch to the face where a shape was drawn so it becomes visible.
- Format elevation name text labelsWith the text selected, use the left panel to set bold, underline, alignment, colour and size.
- ଲେୟର ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ଲେୟର ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଆଇଟମଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଲୁଚାନ୍ତୁ କିମ୍ବା ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁଆଇଟମଗୁଡ଼ିକର ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ ଗୋଷ୍ଠୀକୁ ଏକ ସମୟରେ ଲୁଚାନ୍ତୁ କିମ୍ବା ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ, ସେମାନେ ଥିବା ଲେୟରର ଦୃଶ୍ୟମାନତା ଟୋଗଲ କରି।
- 3D ଡିଜାଇନ୍ରୁ 2D ଚିତ୍ର କିପରି ସ୍ୱୟଂଚାଳିତ ଭାବରେ ଅପଡେଟ୍ ହୁଏ3D ଡିଜାଇନ୍ରେ କରାଯାଇଥିବା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କିପରି ଅଲଗା ସମ୍ପାଦନା ବିନା ଆପଣଙ୍କ 2D ଚିତ୍ର ଏବଂ ଉପସ୍ଥାପନାରେ ପ୍ରତିଫଳିତ ହୁଏ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ ରେଖୀୟ ରିପିଟରର କପି ସଂଖ୍ୟା କିପରି ଗଣନା କରାଯାଏଆରମ୍ଭ ବିନ୍ଦୁରୁ ଶେଷ ବିନ୍ଦୁ ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ଦୂରତା ଏବଂ ବ୍ୟବଧାନ ଏକ ରେଖୀୟ ରିପିଟର କେତେ କପି ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରେ ତାହା ନିର୍ଣ୍ଣୟ କରେ ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- How converting a design group to a user component worksConverting a design group to a user component cannot be undone directly, and dimensions on the component are kept.
- ପୁନଃଲୋଡ ହେଲାବେଳେ ଡାଇମେନସନ ଲାଇନଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଏଲିମେଣ୍ଟ ସ୍ନାପ ପଏଣ୍ଟକୁ କିପରି ପୁନଃ-ଆଙ୍କର ହୁଏପୁନଃଲୋଡ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଏକ ଡାଇମେନସନ ଲାଇନ ଏକ ଏଲିମେଣ୍ଟର ନାମିତ ସ୍ନାପ ପଏଣ୍ଟ ସହିତ କିପରି ନିଜର ସଂଲଗ୍ନତା ବଜାୟ ରଖେ ଏବଂ ସେହି ସ୍ନାପ ପଏଣ୍ଟ ଅଦୃଶ୍ୟ ହେଲେ କଣ ଘଟେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- How dimension values reflect true model dimensionsLearn why dimension values in a design or elevation come from the true model dimensions and how to add extra measurements with the Align tool under Annotate.
- ଗ୍ଲୋବାଲ ଲେୟରକୁ ଉପାଦାନଗୁଡ଼ିକ କିପରି ସ୍ୱୟଂଚାଳିତ ଭାବେ ନ୍ୟସ୍ତ ହୁଅନ୍ତିଆପଣ ଯୋଡ଼ିଥିବା ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଉପାଦାନ ସ୍ୱୟଂଚାଳିତ ଭାବେ ନିଜର ଗ୍ଲୋବାଲ ଲେୟରରେ ରଖାଯାଏ, ଏବଂ ଆପଣ ଏକ କଷ୍ଟମ ଲେୟରରେ ଆଇଟମଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ପୁନଃଗ୍ରୁପ କରିପାରିବେ।
- ନୂତନ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟଗୁଡ଼ିକ କେଉଁ ୟୁନିଟ୍ ଓ ସଠିକତା ବ୍ୟବହାର କରେ ଜାଣନ୍ତୁନୂତନ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟଗୁଡ଼ିକ ମିଲିମିଟରରେ ମାପ କରାଯାଏ, 1 mm ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ସଠିକତା ସହିତ।
- Lock a 3D view with plus view to return to your working angleLock your working camera angle, then zoom and navigate freely and return to it instead of resetting the camera by hand.
- ଆକାରଗୁଡ଼ିକ ସେଟ୍ କରିବା ପରେ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସଂରକ୍ଷିତ ରଖିବା ପାଇଁ ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ଭ୍ୟୁଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଆକାର ଯୋଡ଼ି ଏବଂ ଏହାର ନାମ ଦେବା ପରେ ଏକ ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ଭ୍ୟୁକୁ ଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ୍ କିମ୍ବା 3D କୁ ସୁଇଚ୍ କରିବା ସମୟରେ ଏହାର ସେଟିଂସ୍ ରକ୍ଷା ହେବ।
- ମାପ ଏବଂ ଟିପ୍ପଣୀ ସମାପ୍ତ ହେବା ପରେ ଦୃଶ୍ୟକୁ ଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁମାପ ଏବଂ ଟିପ୍ପଣୀ ଯୋଡ଼ା ହେବା ପରେ ସେଟିଂସରୁ ଦୃଶ୍ୟକୁ ପୁଣି ଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ ମାପ ଏବଂ ବିବରଣୀ ସ୍ଥାନରେ ରହିବ।
- କ୍ୟାମେରା ସ୍ଥିତି ସଂରକ୍ଷିତ ରଖିବା ପାଇଁ ଦୃଶ୍ୟକୁ ଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁନାଭିଗେଟ୍ କରିବା ସମୟରେ କ୍ୟାମେରା ସ୍ଥିତି ସଂରକ୍ଷିତ ରଖିବା ପାଇଁ ଦୃଶ୍ୟକୁ ଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Lock units against movementToggle the lock movement button in a selected unit's property panel header to lock it against movement.
- Make a component and confirm it is placed in the designCreate a component and check that it is confirmed, listed under Components in Design and placed as a copy you can select.
- Manage global layers from global preferencesOpen the fourth global preferences button to manage system and custom layers, set them global or view-specific, and control rich view with finishes per layer.
- Match gimbal arrow colours to the Position panel axesLearn how the colour of each gimbal arrow tells you which axis value in the Position panel to edit.
- Measure a distance with the ME shortcutUse ME and pick two points to measure the distance between them.
- Mirror a panel design shape onto the opposite shutterMirror a selected shape with MI, switch the operation from copy to move, and pick from the centre top to the centre bottom so it lands on the opposite shutter.
- Mirror selected geometry about a picked centre pointReflect the selected object to the other side of a centre point you pick.
- Move a component along the X, Y or Z axisLearn which direction the X, Y and Z axes run so you can move a component along a specific axis using the directions.
- Move a selected object with keys and gimbal arrowsLearn the keyboard and gimbal-arrow shortcuts that move a selected object by exact distances in the floor plan and 3D view.
- Move a unit with the gimbal or the position fieldsReposition a unit in the floor plan or with the 3D gimbal, using the coloured axis handles to move it in the direction you want.
- Move elements with MV and snap only to green dotsReposition an element such as a loft with the MV command, then pull it slightly forward to fine-tune its position.
- Navigate and zoom with an external mouse and keyboard shortcutsPan with shift and the middle mouse button, and zoom in, out, all or to selection with keyboard shortcuts.
- Navigate the 3D view with a long-press of the mouse scroll buttonMove around the 3D view by long-pressing the mouse scroll button to navigate the workspace.
- Offset a line with copy or move in panel designChoose copy to duplicate a selected line at a distance or move to relocate it without a duplicate.
- Offset only applies to the lines that exist in the sketchWhen you offset a line in panel edit shape, the offset is generated only for the lines already drawn.
- Open Preferences and switch comment mode in a designOpen the Preferences panel to view and change the Active Sales Channel, and switch the 3D view into comment mode.
- ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନରୁ ଟାଇଲିଂ ସ୍କେଚର ମୋଡ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନରୁ ଟାଇଲିଂ ସ୍କେଚର ମୋଡ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସମାପ୍ତ ହେଲେ ଡିଜାଇନକୁ ଫେରନ୍ତୁ।
- Override layer line styles in a view's View Specific LayersSet a layer's Line Color, Line Type and Line Thickness for one view with its pencil, and see which layers are Overridden.
- ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଭ୍ୟୁପୋର୍ଟକୁ ପ୍ୟାନ୍, ଅର୍ବିଟ୍ ଏବଂ ଜୁମ୍ କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ୟାନ୍, ଅର୍ବିଟ୍ ଏବଂ ଜୁମ୍ ପାଇଁ ମାଉସ୍ ଏବଂ କୀବୋର୍ଡ ସର୍ଟକଟ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଭ୍ୟୁପୋର୍ଟରେ ଘୁଞ୍ଚନ୍ତୁ।
- Pick an object and set its rotationWith the tool active, select the object and rotate it by dragging or typing the angle.
- Position drills in 2D panel mode with XYZ coordinatesAdd drills in 2D panel mode and fine-tune their placement by applying an offset to the default position.
- Rename a view in Free viewDouble-click a view to rename it.
- ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ବ୍ୟବଧାନରେ copy mode fixed distance ସହିତ ଏକ ବସ୍ତୁକୁ ପୁନରାବୃତ୍ତି କରନ୍ତୁcopy command ଚଲାଇ, copy mode ବାଛି ଏବଂ ଏକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ଦୂରତା ସେଟ୍ କରି ନିୟମିତ ବ୍ୟବଧାନରେ ଏକ ବସ୍ତୁକୁ ପୁନରାବୃତ୍ତି କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Repeat profiles with automatic parameter calculationUse the repeater tool in Edit Panel Design to copy and array profiles while the spacing and end point parameters update automatically with the panel size.
- Resize imported 3D models by height, width and depthAdjust an imported 3D model's height, width and depth so it appears at the right size, with the aspect ratio keeping it proportional.
- Revert a sketch panel to a simple rectangular panelConvert a sketch panel back to a simple rectangular shape using Revert on its Edit Shape toolbar, confirming the prompt to continue.
- Rotate a displaced loft unit back to its original orientationRotate the loft unit three more times to bring it back to its original orientation.
- Rotate and place units precisely with spacebar and MVRotate a unit while placing it with the spacebar, then use the MV shortcut for precise placement.
- Rotate furniture in 2D around its center pointTurn a furniture item in 2D with the space bar for 90-degree steps or the rotation arrows for custom angles, always around its center point.
- Rotate objects from the Sketch tab in the designOpen the Sketch tab in the design and choose Rotate once sketch tools are enabled.
- Rotate objects in the 2D sketcher and 2D machiningOpen the Home tab in the 2D sketcher, tiling and cutting mode or panel 2D machining and choose Rotate.
- Rotate the 3D view using bottom-right controlsOrbit the model with the rotation controls to view it from any side without changing the design itself.
- ମଧ୍ୟ ମାଉସ୍ ବଟନ୍ ସହିତ 3D ଦୃଶ୍ୟକୁ ଘୂରାନ୍ତୁମଧ୍ୟ ମାଉସ୍ ବଟନ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି 3D ଦୃଶ୍ୟକୁ ଘୂରାନ୍ତୁ, କିମ୍ବା ସେହି କାମ ପାଇଁ ୱାର୍କିଂ ସ୍ପେସ୍ର ତଳ ଡାହାଣରେ ଥିବା ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ଚକ୍ରିକା ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Round shape corners using the fillet radius optionCurve a corner of a drawn shape by setting the Fillet Tool's edge length reduction and applying it to two adjoining edges.
- Search and place props in the designFind a prop by searching and place it in your design.
- ସର୍ଟକଟ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରୁ ଯେକୌଣସି କମାଣ୍ଡ କିମ୍ବା ସର୍ଟକଟ ଖୋଜନ୍ତୁମେନୁ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଖୋଜିବା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତେ ସର୍ଟକଟ ପ୍ୟାନେଲର ସର୍ଚ୍ଚରେ ଟାଇପ୍ କରି ଯେକୌଣସି କମାଣ୍ଡ କିମ୍ବା ସର୍ଟକଟ ଖୋଜନ୍ତୁ।
- Select a cabinet before rotating itSelect the cabinet first so rotating it does not move it out of its bounding box.
- Select items in the design portal with the left mouse buttonUse the left mouse button in the design portal to select items.
- Select items with left-to-right and right-to-left dragsDraw a selection box in either direction to pick contained or touching items, and marquee-select in 3D.
- Select multiple objects with area selectDrag the mouse across several objects to select them all at once with area select.
- Set default door, window and wall properties via PreferencesSet default properties for repeated elements so newly added doors, windows, elevations and walls inherit the same values across all rooms.
- Set exterior lighting with Env. Map or Sun lightOpen Exterior Lighting and choose either an environment map or sunlight to light the outside of your design.
- Set modular furniture size via quick access dimensionsChange the size of a placed modular furniture model by updating its quick access dimensions.
- Set the wall location line to match the dimension typeMatch the wall location line to the dimension you need so outer-to-outer, inner-to-inner and centre-to-centre values measure from the intended face.
- Set up a repeater's Angular modePlace copies around a centre point by setting the Angular mode's centre, radius, angles, step and direction.
- ଭ୍ୟୁ ସେଟିଂସ ବାରରେ ଭ୍ୟୁ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁଭ୍ୟୁ ସେଟିଂସ ବାରରେ ଭ୍ୟୁ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସେଠାରେ କନଫିଗର ହୋଇଥିବା ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଭ୍ୟୁର ନିଜସ୍ୱ ସେଟିଂସ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ।
- କ୍ରସ୍ ସେକ୍ସନ୍ ଏଲିଭେସନରେ ଲୁଚିତ ଧାରଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁସେହି ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ପ୍ରକାର ବାଛନ୍ତୁ ଯାହା ସର୍ବଦା ଲୁଚିତ ଧାରଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଆଙ୍କେ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ କଟ୍ ବ୍ୟାକ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ପରି ଅଂଶଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଦେଖାଏ।
- Start making a component from the floor planOpen the Components panel from the floor plan to create a new component or import one from a DWG, then select objects and set a base point.
- 2D ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ ଏବଂ 3D ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ସ୍ୱିଚ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ2D ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ ଏବଂ 3D ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ସ୍ୱିଚ୍ କରି ସ୍ଥିତି ବାର୍ ଏବଂ ପ୍ରପର୍ଟି ପ୍ୟାନେଲ କିପରି ପ୍ରତିକ୍ରିୟା ଦେଉଛି ଦେଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Switch the tracing background from Image to DWG FileSwitch the floor menu's Tracing Background from Image to DWG File so you can set an active DWG and use its layers, scale and position.
- ନାଭିଗେସନ ବାରରୁ ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ, 3D ଏବଂ ଏଲିଭେସନ ଟୋଗଲ କରନ୍ତୁଡିଜାଇନ ୱାର୍କସ୍ପେସର ଉପର ଭାଗରେ ଥିବା ନାଭିଗେସନ ବାର ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନ, 3D ଏବଂ ଏଲିଭେସନ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ସୁଇଚ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସ୍ତରଗୁଡ଼ିକ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଗମନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Understand dimension attachment circles and delete extra dimensionsClick a dimension to see a circle marking what it is attached to, and remove any extra dimensions you no longer need.
- Understand global layers in the designLearn what the global layers panel lists and what a layer controls.
- Understand the X, Y and Z axes in the design workspaceLearn which direction each axis runs in the design workspace.
- Understand why view-level edits stay in one viewLearn that changes made after unlocking a view apply only to that view, and that each named view keeps its own layer visibility.
- ସ୍ତର ଦୃଶ୍ୟତା କିମ୍ବା ଅବଜେକ୍ଟ ଗୁଣଧର୍ମ ବଦଳାଇବା ପାଇଁ ଏକ ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ଅନଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁସ୍ତର ଦୃଶ୍ୟତା କିମ୍ବା ଅବଜେକ୍ଟ ଗୁଣଧର୍ମ ବଦଳାଇବା ପାଇଁ ଏକ ସଞ୍ଚିତ ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ଅନଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏହାକୁ ପୁଣି ଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Use an external mouse for 3D navigation in the design viewportZoom in and out and orbit in 3D mode in the design viewport, with global preferences and settings at the bottom of the interface.
- Use AutoCAD-style drawing and editing tools in InfurniaDraw and edit with the same tools you know from AutoCAD, including line, three-point arc, rectangle, circle, polyline, trim, extend, offset, fillet, copy and mirror.
- Use copy and array to place multiple copies at fixed spacing or countPlace several copies of an item at a fixed spacing or count, or fall back to a single free copy per click.
- ଆରେ ପ୍ଲେସମେଣ୍ଟରେ ଗୋଟିଏ ଟେକ୍ସଟ୍ କପି ପାଇଁ କପି ମୋଡ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଅନ୍ତରାଳରେ ଟେକ୍ସଟ୍ ପୁନରାବୃତ୍ତି ନକରି ଉଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ସ୍ଥାନରେ ଟେକ୍ସଟ୍ର ଗୋଟିଏ କପି ରଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Use ME E enter shortcut to measure in the designTake measurements in the design with the 'ME E enter' shortcut, for example to confirm a blind corner measurement.
- ଡିଜାଇନରେ ଜୁମ୍, ପ୍ୟାନ୍, ଚୟନ ଏବଂ ଅର୍ବିଟ୍ ପାଇଁ ମାଉସ୍ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଇଣ୍ଟରଫେସରେ କେଉଁ ମାଉସ୍ କ୍ରିୟା ଜୁମ୍, ପ୍ୟାନ୍, ଚୟନ ଏବଂ ଦୃଶ୍ୟକୁ ଅର୍ବିଟ୍ କରେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- ମିଳିତ ପାଠ୍ୟ ଏବଂ ତୀର ଟିପ୍ପଣୀ ପାଇଁ ମଲ୍ଟିଲିଡର ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁତୀର ଏବଂ ପାଠ୍ୟକୁ ଏକ ଟିପ୍ପଣୀ ଭାବରେ ଏକତ୍ର ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଉଭୟକୁ ପରେ ସମାୟୋଜିତ କରାଯାଇପାରିବ।
- Use the MV shortcut to move and place fillersPosition a filler or cabinet precisely by activating the move tool with the MV shortcut.
- ନିର୍ମାଣ ରେଖା ପାଇଁ XL ଏବଂ ଦୂରତାରେ କପି କରିବା ପାଇଁ CP ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁXL ସହିତ ନିର୍ମାଣ ରେଖା ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ CP ସହିତ ଟାଇପ୍ କରାଯାଇଥିବା ଦୂରତାରେ ଏକ ରେଖା କପି କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଆପଣଙ୍କୁ ମାନୁଆଲୀ ମାପ ନେବାକୁ ପଡ଼ିବ ନାହିଁ।
- Use X-ray mode to select unitsEnter X-ray mode with the short form XR so you can select units.
- 3D ୱାର୍କସ୍ପେସରେ ଜୁମ୍, ପ୍ୟାନ୍ ଏବଂ ଘୂର୍ଣ୍ଣନ କରନ୍ତୁମାଉସ ସହିତ 3D ୱାର୍କସ୍ପେସରେ ଘୂରି ବୁଲନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଦ୍ୱାରା ଆପଣ ନିଜର ଡିଜାଇନକୁ ଯେକୌଣସି କୋଣରୁ ଦେଖିପାରିବେ।
- Zoom to fit ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଦୃଶ୍ୟକୁ Shift+Z ସହିତଆପଣଙ୍କ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ର ବସ୍ତୁଗୁଡ଼ିକ ସହିତ ଦୃଶ୍ୟକୁ ଫିଟ୍ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ Shift+Z ଦବାନ୍ତୁ।
- Zoom to the selected item and centre it on the canvasPress Shift+X to zoom to the selected item and centre it on the canvas, and check the Keyboard Shortcuts list for the matching hotkeys.
ଟାଇଲିଂ, ସିଲିଂ ଏବଂ ଫିନିଶ29
- Draw ceilings from the room corner with no wall gapAdd a ceiling by drawing a rectangle from the ceiling command menu, then add tiling the same way.
- Add tiling the same way as a ceilingAdd tiling exactly as you add a ceiling, then adjust its default thickness and pattern options such as 45-degree and 90-degree rotation.
- କ୍ଷେତ୍ର ଚିତ୍ରଣ କରି କିମ୍ବା pick tool ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଫ୍ଲୋର ଟାଇଲ ରଖନ୍ତୁକ୍ଷେତ୍ର ଚିତ୍ରଣ କରି କିମ୍ବା pick tool ଦ୍ୱାରା ରୁମ କେନ୍ଦ୍ର ଚିହ୍ନଟ କରାଇ ଏକ ରୁମରେ ଫ୍ଲୋର ଟାଇଲ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- Add a ceiling and tiling with the pick toolDraw a ceiling and tiling inside the room with the pick tool, then adjust the tiling pattern and size.
- ଟାଇଲିଂ ଏବଂ କଟିଂ ଉପକରଣ ସହିତ ୱାଲ୍ ଟାଇଲ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ୧୨ mm ଏକ୍ସଟ୍ରୁଡ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଆୟତାକାର କ୍ଷେତ୍ର ଚିତ୍ରଣ କରି, ଏହାକୁ ୧୨ mm କୁ ଏକ୍ସଟ୍ରୁଡ୍ କରି ଏବଂ ଏକ ୱାଲ୍ ଟାଇଲ୍ ମେଟେରିଆଲ୍ ବାଛି ଏକ ୱାଲ୍ରେ ୱାଲ୍ ଟାଇଲ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ଣ୍ଣ ଏବଂ ଟାଇଲ୍ ଆକାର ସମାୟୋଜନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- କାନ୍ଥ ଚୟନ କରି ଏବଂ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଉପକରଣ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି କାନ୍ଥ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁକାନ୍ଥକୁ ଚୟନ କରି ଏବଂ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଏବଂ କଟିଂ ଉପକରଣ ସହିତ ଟାଇଲ କ୍ଷେତ୍ର ଆଙ୍କି କାନ୍ଥରେ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (29)
- Apply tiles and adjust tile size, grout colour and patternPick a surface, apply tiling, then choose the pattern, tile size and grout line colour.
- ଟାଇଲିଂ ଏବଂ କଟିଂ ଉପକରଣ ସହିତ ଏକ ୱାଲ୍ ଟାଇଲ୍ କ୍ଲାଡିଂ କ୍ଷେତ୍ର ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁଟାଇଲିଂ ଏବଂ କଟିଂ ଉପକରଣରେ କ୍ଲାଡିଂ ସୀମା ଅଙ୍କନ କରି ଏବଂ ତାହା ଲାଗୁ କରି ଏକ କାନ୍ଥକୁ ଟାଇଲ୍ ସହିତ ଆବରଣ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Sweep Tool ସହିତ କର୍ନିସ୍, ମୋଲ୍ଡିଂ ଏବଂ ୱାଲ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁକଷ୍ଟମ କର୍ନିସ୍, ମୋଲ୍ଡିଂ ଏବଂ ସାଜସଜ୍ଜା ୱାଲ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ିବା ପାଇଁ କାନ୍ଥରେ Sweep Tool ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ୱାଲ୍ ମୋଲ୍ଡିଂ ଓ ଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପାଇଁ ଟାଇଲିଂ କଟିଂରେ sweep mode ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ୱାଲ୍ ଫିନିଶ୍ ମ୍ୟାଟେରିଆଲ୍ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ୱାଲପେପର୍ କିମ୍ବା ପେଣ୍ଟ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁୱାଲର ଫିନିଶ୍ ମ୍ୟାଟେରିଆଲ୍ ବିକଳ୍ପରୁ ଚୟନ କରି ଏକ ୱାଲକୁ ୱାଲପେପର୍ କିମ୍ବା ପେଣ୍ଟ ଫିନିଶ୍ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ।
- ଟାଇଲିଂ ଗଭୀରତା, ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନ, ଟାଇଲ ଆକାର ଏବଂ ଗ୍ରାଉଟିଂ ସମାୟୋଜିତ କରନ୍ତୁଟାଇଲିଂ ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନକୁ ଯେକୌଣସି ଡିଗ୍ରୀକୁ ଘୂର୍ଣ୍ଣନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସେହି ପ୍ୟାନେଲରୁ ଟାଇଲ ଆକାର, ଗ୍ରାଉଟିଂ ଲାଇନ ଏବଂ ଗ୍ରାଉଟିଂ ରଙ୍ଗ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Apply ceiling tiling from the architecture menuSelect the pick tool, click inside the room and apply the ceiling to tile it.
- Build layered custom wall designs with tiling and fixed-distance copyCreate a custom wall design such as a rafter by building each layer from a rectangle with its own dimensions and extrude depth.
- Change ceiling tile pattern material and grouting line colourApply a tile as the ceiling pattern material and then change the colour of its grouting lines.
- ଏକ ଫ୍ଲୋର ଟାଇଲିଂର ଟାଇଲ, ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନ ଏବଂ ଗ୍ରାଉଟ୍ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁArchitecture > Add Tiling ସହିତ ଏକ ଫ୍ଲୋର ଟାଇଲିଂ ଆଙ୍କନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଟାଇଲିଂର ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣରୁ ଏହାର ଟାଇଲ ଆକାର, ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନ ଏବଂ ଗ୍ରାଉଟ୍ ଲାଇନ୍ ସମାୟୋଜିତ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଟାଇଲ ଆକାର ସେଟ କରିବା ପୂର୍ବରୁ ଟାଇଲ ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁକୌଣସି ରୁମ ପୃଷ୍ଠରେ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଲଗାନ୍ତୁ, ପ୍ରଥମେ ଟାଇଲ ଲେଆଉଟ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନ ଅନୁମତି ଦେଉଥିବା ଟାଇଲ ଆକାର ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଟାଇଲିଂ ପ୍ରପର୍ଟିରୁ ଟାଇଲ ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ଣ୍ଣ, ଆକାର, ଗ୍ରାଉଟ ଏବଂ ମ୍ୟାଟେରିଆଲ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁଲାଗୁ ହୋଇଥିବା ଫ୍ଲୋରର ଟାଇଲିଂ ପ୍ରପର୍ଟିରୁ ଏହାର ଲେଆଉଟ ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ଣ୍ଣ, ଟାଇଲ ଆକାର, ଗ୍ରାଉଟ ଲାଇନ ଏବଂ ଟାଇଲ ମ୍ୟାଟେରିଆଲ ସମାୟୋଜିତ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Change tile size and material from the tile optionsSelect a tile to see its depth, then set its dimensions and apply a pattern or material at the scale you want.
- Change tiling material from flooring to wall tilesSwitch the material applied to a tiled surface from flooring tiles to wall tiles in the tiling pattern settings.
- ଟାଇଲିଂ ଭିତରେ ଲାଇନ୍ ଟୁଲ୍ ସହିତ ଏକ ଖୋଲା-ମୁଣ୍ଡ ବାଉଣ୍ଡାରୀ ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ କରନ୍ତୁଟାଇଲିଂ ସଫଳ ହେବା ପାଇଁ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଫଙ୍କସନ୍ ଭିତରେ ଲାଇନ୍ ଟୁଲ୍ ସହିତ ଏହାର ଅନୁପସ୍ଥିତ ଧାର ଆଙ୍କି ଏକ ଖୋଲା-ମୁଣ୍ଡ ଡ୍ରାଫ୍ଟ ହୋଇଥିବା କ୍ଷେତ୍ର ବନ୍ଦ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Convert an extruded surface to tiling and set tile patternTurn a drawn surface from extrude into tiling, pick a pattern and tile size, and adjust the grout to finish.
- Create a ceiling or tiling from a closed room shapePick the shape tool, select a closed room shape, and apply it to create a ceiling or tiling.
- ଟାଇଲିଂ ଏବଂ କଟିଂ ଉପକରଣ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି କାନ୍ଥରେ ଏକ ଡାଡୋ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁକାନ୍ଥ ପୃଷ୍ଠରେ ଏକ ବନ୍ଦ ଡାଡୋ ଆକୃତି ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଏବଂ କଟିଂ ଉପକରଣ ଏହାକୁ ଡାଡୋ ଭାବରେ ପ୍ରୟୋଗ କରିବ।
- ସଜଡ଼ାଇ ଏବଂ ଅନାବଶ୍ୟକ ରେଖା ସଠିକ୍ କରିବା ପାଇଁ 3D ରେ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଆକୃତି ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁ3D ରେ ଟାଇଲିଂ ସଜଡ଼ାଇ ସମାୟୋଜନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଅନାବଶ୍ୟକ ଆଉଟଲାଇନ୍ ରେଖା ସଫା କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଆପଣ ଚାହୁଁଥିବା ଆକୃତିକୁ ଅନୁସରଣ କରିବ।
- Enable grouting lines and adjust their appearanceTurn on grouting lines and then adjust their appearance, for example make them darker, to suit the design.
- Enable grouting lines and customize pattern sizesEnable grouting lines and customize pattern sizes for your tiles.
- ତଳ ଡାହାଣରୁ ଟାଇଲିଂ ଲେଆଉଟ୍ ପ୍ଲାନ୍ କିମ୍ବା ପ୍ରତିଫଳିତ ସିଲିଂ ପ୍ଲାନ୍ ସକ୍ଷମ କରନ୍ତୁଟାଇଲିଂ ଲେଆଉଟ୍ ପ୍ଲାନ୍ କିମ୍ବା ପ୍ରତିଫଳିତ ସିଲିଂ ପ୍ଲାନ୍ ବିକଳ୍ପ ଚାଲୁ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଆପଣ ଲାଇଟ୍ ଭଳି ସିଲିଂ ଉପାଦାନ ରଖି ସଜାଡ଼ି ପାରିବେ।
- Open the Tiling Pattern options for a selected tilingOpen the Tiling Pattern header in the Tiling Zone panel to reach rotation, pattern, tile size, grout line and material settings.
- ଟାଇଲିଂ ଏବଂ କଟିଂ ଟୁଲରେ extrude, cut ଏବଂ front shift ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁଟାଇଲିଂ ଏବଂ କଟିଂ ଟୁଲରେ ଏକ ଆକୃତି ଆଙ୍କନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏହାକୁ extrude କରନ୍ତୁ, କାନ୍ଥରେ cut କରନ୍ତୁ କିମ୍ବା ଆପଣଙ୍କ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ତିଆରି କରିବାକୁ ଏହାକୁ ଆଗକୁ shift କରନ୍ତୁ।
କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ସେଟଅପ ଏବଂ ନିର୍ମାଣ161
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ନିର୍ମାଣ, ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ, କାଉଣ୍ଟରଟପ୍ ଏବଂ କାର୍କାସ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ କଷ୍ଟମାଇଜ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଚୟନିତ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ର ନିର୍ମାଣ, ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ, କାଉଣ୍ଟରଟପ୍ ଏବଂ କାର୍କାସ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ସେଟ୍ କରିବାକୁ କଷ୍ଟମାଇଜ୍ ଟ୍ୟାବ୍ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁ।
- ଡିଫଲ୍ଟ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ନିର୍ମାଣ ପାରାମିଟର ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରନ୍ତୁବ୍ୟାକ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଗ୍ରୁଭିଂ, ଶଟର ରିଡକ୍ସନ, ସେଲଫ ରିଭିଲ, ବ୍ୟାକ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଅଫସେଟ ଏବଂ ବେସ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ଟପ୍ସ ପାଇଁ Infurnia ବ୍ୟବହାର କରୁଥିବା ଡିଫଲ୍ଟ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- ୟୁନିଟ୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାକୁ ଡାହାଣ ପାର୍ଶ୍ୱରେ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁଅଣ-କାଠ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଚାଲୁ କରନ୍ତୁ, କାର୍କାସ୍ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସଠିକ୍ ଭାବରେ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ପ୍ରତି ପାର୍ଶ୍ୱରେ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଦୃଶ୍ୟମାନତା ସକ୍ଷମ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Configure cabinet back, top, bottom and side panels in designConfigure each cabinet panel individually so its size, material, edge band, lighting and hardware match the construction you need.
- Configure skirting, carcass panels and offsets in Construction tabSet how skirting, carcass panels and back panel offsets appear in the Construction tab so your cabinet's manufacturing output matches the design.
- Reference panel thickness in cabinet construction formulasReference a panel's thickness in a construction formula by picking the thickness parameter from the suggestions instead of typing raw numbers.
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (161)
- Compare wardrobe and kitchen cabinet heightsSee how wardrobe height includes the skirting while kitchen cabinet height is the carcass box alone.
- Copy and paste a cabinet to create similar cabinets quicklyFully adjust one cabinet first, then copy and paste it to create multiple similar cabinets faster than adjusting each one individually.
- Understand how cabinets and drawer channels appear in the Pricing QuotationLearn how Base Unit, Wall Unit and Tall Unit cabinets are labelled and listed, and how a drawer's channel is counted and priced in the quotation.
- Create an open corner unit by removing the shuttersPlace a standard corner unit, remove its shutters to make it open, and save the result for reuse.
- How back panel extension uses a 10 mm offsetLearn how the back panel extension is built with a 10 mm offset.
- Apply construction styles to cabinets and corner unitsLearn that construction styles are defined separately for cabinets and for corner units.
- Configure a shutter system's handles, profiles, colours and glassChoose the handle type, profile, colour and glass options for a cabinet shutter system, knowing the system setting stays separate from per-shutter edits.
- Create a kitchen layout by placing one unit then copying and aligningPlace one wall unit or loft in the correct position, then copy and align the remaining units to build your kitchen layout.
- How kitchen cabinet skirting affects total unit heightLearn how the roughly 100 mm skirting on a kitchen cabinet adds to the carcass height shown in the dimensions to give the total unit height.
- How Minifix and dowel placement is automatedLearn what drives the automatic placement of Minifix and dowels in a carcass.
- How wall unit height is calculatedLearn what the sum of tiling, skirting, cabinet and granite thickness actually measures and where a wall unit's height from the floor comes from.
- Move cabinets in 2D and 3D viewsMove a cabinet up and down and reposition it in either the 2D view or the 3D view.
- Understand corner unit depthLearn that the depth of a corner unit is the box depth excluding the shutter.
- Understand L-corner unit dimensions and shutter optionsLearn how the Front Back, Side Back, Side Left and Side Right dimensions map to an L-corner unit's faces and which shutter systems it offers.
- Apply construction and manufacturing settings via bulk edit structureApply construction and manufacturing configuration settings to cabinets and wardrobes using the bulk edit structure option.
- Apply sliding and corner shutter mechanisms correctlyPlace sliding shutters only on the outer partition and pick a mechanism the corner shape supports.
- Change cabinet size and understand material categoriesResize a cabinet from the properties panel and learn how its materials are grouped.
- Convert a shutter cabinet to drawers and baskets by editing the systemTurn a single-shutter cabinet into a wicker basket and drawer unit by removing the shutter and customizing the system, then add, remove and adjust drawers and partitions.
- How kitchen tall unit height and depth are measuredLearn which parts of a kitchen tall unit are left out when its height and depth are measured.
- Add a custom construction unit from the catalogue warehouse to a designBring a warehouse base unit into your catalogue so it appears under furnish in the design portal.
- Add a lock to a cabinet panelAdd the lock to the panel in the design and reduce the panel size by 30 mm to accommodate it.
- Combine two cabinets into a single user componentCombine two separate cabinets into one user component that behaves as a single unit.
- Extend a cabinet end panel to the floor or ceilingExtend an end panel added from a cabinet's End Panel section downward to the floor or upward from its own panel using the Width Extension values.
- Extend panels to the floor using construction settings and formulasExtend a visible panel to the ground through its construction settings and drive panel sizes with formulas so they adjust automatically.
- How cabinet material properties are setA cabinet's material properties are set through several separate fields, and the shutter external finish is typically chosen separately from the rest.
- How cabinet module width, height and depth ranges are enforcedLearn how each cabinet module's sizing rule sets minimum and maximum width, height and depth and keeps designers within those limits.
- Remove the skirting from a unitSwitch off the front skirting under Skirting Visibility so the unit no longer shows skirting at the front.
- Set drawer side reductions and fascia extensions in a drawer unitAdjust a drawer's own panel reductions and extensions to resize and reshape its fascia in a 3 Drawer Unit.
- Understand center cabinet side panel constructionLearn how center cabinet side panels are built by default and how the left, right, top and bottom panels fit together.
- Understand corner unit shapes and their construction optionsSee which corner unit shapes exist and how curved fronts, back panel offset and hanging rods behave.
- Understand kitchen cabinet height in the quick access panelLearn what the height in a kitchen cabinet's quick access panel measures and what editing it changes.
- Understand the kitchen base corner unit top panelLearn that a kitchen base corner unit uses a full top panel.
- Add a standard wardrobe internal configuration with one clickAdd a standard configuration such as a bottom drawer to a wardrobe with a single click instead of building it manually.
- Add a vertical partition and set its widthSplit a cabinet space with a vertical partition and size it by ratio or by explicit widths.
- Add cabinets using FR enter and room templatesOpen the cabinet library with FR and enter, then place, rotate, resize and duplicate base or wall units.
- Configure wardrobe structure with Carcass panel constructionUse the Carcass panel construction section to configure wardrobe structure and add internal and external components such as vertical panels and drawers.
- Convert a carcass panel into rails and set rail depthTurn a selected carcass panel such as the top or back into rails and control how deep those rails are.
- Fix a cabinet width that is outside the allowed limitsEnter a cabinet width within the allowed limits so the system stops showing an error that the construction is invalid.
- How linked cores, postlam thickness and drill parameters workLearn how a linked back panel core overrides the carcass back core, how laminates add to panel thickness, and where connector drill sizes come from.
- How standard base unit dimensions workLearn the standard base unit depth and height used in kitchen modelling and what those measurements leave out.
- How wardrobe construction style stores carcass parametersLearn which carcass parameters a wardrobe unit construction style holds and how updating the style applies them to the wardrobe.
- Manage and edit existing cabinet items in the admin portalManage and edit existing cabinet items in the admin portal.
- Open and preset design preferences for cabinets and wardrobesReach the design's preference screens and decide whether to set cabinet and wardrobe defaults per project or once at admin level.
- Place dresser, TV and tall units from the furniture model libraryPlace dresser, TV and tall units using pre-built models or your own design, then adjust them to fit.
- Repurpose a cabinet into another unit typeEdit a cabinet's construction to turn it into a study table or TV unit and build the storage you need.
- See an element's properties in the properties panelSelect any element in a design to see its properties in the properties panel, including wall, door and window specifics.
- Set shelf and partition edge visibility in wardrobe preferencesSet the front/carcass visible edge band to carcass invisible for fixed shelves, adjustable shelves and vertical partition panels in Cabinet Preference / Wardrobe Preference.
- Split a partition into child partitionsAdd vertical panels or shelves to split a parent partition and edit each child side separately.
- Understand how inset and outset carcass edges change panel sizesLearn how each per-edge construction choice decides which panel covers the other's end and resizes both panels.
- Use multi-purpose model furniture for box frames instead of manual panelsPlace a unit that already includes its frame box and adjust the box depth by editing the depth value.
- Use the selection tree to reach cabinet, partition, shutter and panel controlsSelect a cabinet part to expose the levels above it and jump straight to the controls you need.
- Build a TV unit from modular base, wall and open unitsOpen the Furnish panel, choose multi-purpose modular furniture, and combine, rotate and position units to compose a TV unit.
- Bulk change unit width, depth and height from base unitsSelect the base units and edit the width, depth and height values to change their dimensions in bulk.
- Cabinet properties panel tabsLearn how the cabinet properties panel is organised into quick access, customize and construction tabs.
- Calculate carcass width from overall cabinet widthWork out the carcass width by taking the overall cabinet width and subtracting twice the carcass panel thickness.
- Change the default internal depth of 500 mm for drawersLearn how the suggested 500 mm internal depth for drawers is set and how to override it to the depth you need.
- Change the structure of multiple wall units at onceSelect all wall units except the corner units, then use the bulk action and choose bulk structure to change them together.
- Change wardrobe shutter material, edge band, handle and placement in propertiesSelect a wardrobe and change its shutter materials and finishes, edge bands, handles and handle placement from the properties panel.
- Choose corner unit type when creating a corner-unit construction styleSet the unit type to corner unit in the construction style settings so the style applies to corner units rather than standard units.
- Choose the right preference group for the unit type you placePick the preference group that matches the unit type being placed so base units, wall units, lofts and multi-purpose units use cabinet preferences and wardrobes use wardrobe preferences.
- Configure blind corner units as right-hand or left-handSet a blind corner unit to the right-hand or left-hand side option so it is configured correctly.
- Edit and customise cabinets in the designAdjust standard cabinet elements such as double shelves so modules fit your design instead of staying as supplied.
- Edit cabinet components in the design moduleChange the finishes, materials, skirting and internal finishes of a single cabinet from the properties tab, quick access, customize, the construction tab or the selection tree.
- Extend a wardrobe beyond 900 mmRemove the width cap so a wardrobe or cabinet can be widened past a fixed limit such as 900 mm.
- Find catalogue items by marked room typeMark a room type so the catalogue lists everything related to it under the matching furniture and accessories categories, making items easier to search and place.
- Hang wall cabinets with wall cabinet hanging bracketsUse wall cabinet hanging brackets from the hardware warehouse to hang wall cabinets.
- ଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ କିପରି ସ୍ତରରେ ସଂଗଠିତ ହୁଏଡିଜାଇନ୍ ମଡ୍ୟୁଲରେ ଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍, ପାର୍ଟିସନ୍, ଶଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ୍ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ସ୍ତରରୁ ନିର୍ମିତ, ଏବଂ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ସ୍ତରର ନିଜସ୍ୱ ସେଟିଂସ୍ ଥାଏ।
- How a tandem drawer's panel sizes are calculatedLearn how a tandem drawer's bottom and back panel depths and heights are derived from the tandem item's dimensions.
- How cabinets above 1800 mm are treated as loft unitsLearn how the Auto Presentation template's minimum elevation and Loft detection switch decide whether a cabinet above 1800 mm counts as a loft unit.
- How countertops affect displayed base unit heightLearn why adding or removing a countertop on a base unit never changes the carcass height shown for that unit.
- How minimum and maximum cabinet size limits workLearn how minimum and maximum size limits apply to a cabinet's width, height and depth and where they are configured.
- How panel dimensions are driven by extensions and cabinet adjustmentsLearn how a panel's total thickness is calculated from its core and finishes, and how that calculation differs for pre-laminated and post-laminated core materials.
- How wardrobe back panel grooving follows construction settingsLearn how the back panel extension values from the wardrobe SKU and design preferences set how far back panels run into the surrounding panels.
- Open construction styles from admin preference settingsOpen admin preference settings and go to construction styles to set up construction styles.
- Place wall units and tall units from the kitchen furniture libraryPlace a wall or tall unit from the kitchen furniture library and adjust its dimensions, using the same placement options as other cabinet types.
- Rotate a cabinet before or after placing itPlace a cabinet from the furnish tool and rotate it with the space bar before placing or with the rotate option afterwards.
- Set cabinet preferences per project or as admin defaultSet the default cabinet settings a new project starts with, split into carcass, shutter and handle.
- Set carcass and back-panel core material defaults before placing cabinetsChoose the carcass core and back-panel core materials in the cabinet-level preference so new cabinets pick them up.
- ସାଇଜିଂ ନିୟମ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ର ସର୍ବନିମ୍ନ ଓ ସର୍ବାଧିକ ଆକାର ସୀମା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁସ୍ରୋତ ମଡେଲ୍ ଏବଂ ଆଡମିନ୍ ପୋର୍ଟାଲ୍ରେ ସାଇଜିଂ ନିୟମ କନଫିଗର କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ର ଆକାର ଅନୁମତିପ୍ରାପ୍ତ ସୀମା ଅତିକ୍ରମ କରିପାରିବ ନାହିଁ।
- Set or change a hob's sizeChoose a hob size preset in the catalogue or adjust the height, width and depth of a placed hob to match what the customer selected.
- Set sizing rules on cabinet or partition for outer and inner limitsChoose whether a unit's limits apply to its outer dimensions or its internal clear space, and apply them one unit at a time or in bulk.
- Set the carcass railing option for the top panelSet the carcass railing option so the top panel is a rail panel or a full panel, and adjust construction per side to match the required design.
- Size the top panel for gola and G-profile cabinetsLearn how the gola profile offsets the top panel toward the back while a G-profile keeps it at carcass size.
- Switch catalogue categories with the carouselUse the carousel to see the current furniture category and move between categories such as base unit, wall unit, tall unit, fillers and loft.
- Understand end panels and side panels as separate panel typesLearn how a cabinet's side panels and end panels are distinct panel types with their own extension settings.
- Use carcass panel thickness formula to auto-adjust internal dimensionsEnter a formula based on carcass panel thickness instead of a manually calculated internal dimension, and let the system adjust the internal space to the correct value.
- Add base, wall, tall and loft fillers from the kitchen fillers libraryPlace base, wall unit, wall, tall unit and loft fillers in your kitchen design the same way you place cabinets.
- Add beams via custom construction with height and depthAdd beams through custom construction with height and depth, while other components such as lofts, wardrobes, cabinets and kitchen elements come directly from the catalog.
- Add kitchen units from Furnish panel dropdownsAdd base, sink, drawer, tall/appliance and filler units to your kitchen plan from the Furnish panel dropdowns.
- Add or change a back panel on an appliance unitAppliance units come with an open back by default so heat can radiate, and you can add or change a closed or coloured back panel in the open part of the construction.
- Add props at partition level so they move with the cabinetAdd props at partition level so they travel with the cabinet, then fine-tune their position in the furniture layer with X, Y and Z offsets.
- Add props to cabinets via partition-level customizationAdd bags, suitcases, storage boxes and other props to a cabinet by customizing a partition.
- Build an L-shaped beam unit in a wardrobeSet the wardrobe's overall height, width and depth at wardrobe level before building the L-shaped beam unit.
- Build cabinet units by dividing with shelves and vertical panelsDivide a cabinet unit with shelves and vertical panels, then adjust the section heights afterwards.
- Bulk edit structure on owned cabinets, not library itemsBulk structure edit only works on owned cabinets and wardrobes, so copy a library item into your own folder before changing its construction.
- Change carcass sizes to update manufacturing outputsChange carcass sizes as required and the manufacturing outputs update automatically.
- Change default carcass sizesChange the default carcass sizes to match your own requirements and let the manufacturing outputs update automatically.
- Change default construction values to client standardsChange the stored standard defaults so construction values match a client's own construction standards.
- Change the handle type on library furnitureChange the handle type on furniture you added from the library so it no longer keeps the default surface handle.
- Choose a kitchen cabinet typeLearn which cabinet types the kitchen module offers for your design.
- Choose between Quick Access, Customize and ConstructionPick the cabinet customization menu that matches the change you want to make, whether it is a regular change or adding elements.
- Choose custom and kitchen filler panel typesLearn which custom panel shapes and kitchen filler panel types you can add to a design.
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ପାଇଁ ସଠିକ୍ ବାମ କିମ୍ବା ଡାହାଣ ଏଣ୍ଡ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ବାଛନ୍ତୁକ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ରେ ଏକ ବାମ କିମ୍ବା ଡାହାଣ ଏଣ୍ଡ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ଏହା ଜାଣି ରଖନ୍ତୁ ଯେ ୟୁନିଟ୍ର ଶଟର୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସାମ୍ନା କରି ପାର୍ଶ୍ୱ ନିର୍ଣ୍ଣୟ କରାଯାଏ।
- Convert a modular unit to a user component via common modular unit actionsSelect several standard modular units together and turn them into one reusable user component.
- Customize cabinets through the selection treeUse the selection tree and its icons to customize a cabinet however you want.
- Drive panel and shutter dimensions with parametric valuesGive panel and shutter dimensions a parametric value so they resize automatically when the driving measurement changes.
- Edit an existing cabinet SKU in the component editorOpen an existing cabinet SKU with the edit SKU action so its saved construction loads in the component editor ready to adjust.
- Edit countertop and XYZ position from Quick AccessUse the Quick Access position controls to move a unit horizontally with X and Z and vertically with Y, while cabinet and shutter removal and constructional changes stay in the customize and construction options.
- Edit sink dimensions from the furniture light unitChange a sink's height, width and depth by selecting it and opening the furniture light unit in the selection tree.
- Enter dimensions in the right order for appliances and unitsLearn which dimension order applies to appliances and which to units so you enter each measurement in the right field.
- Find the cabinet editing tabs and selection treeLocate the Quick Access, Customize and Construction tabs and the selection tree you use to edit a cabinet.
- Find the quick access, customization and construction tabsLearn what the three interface tabs are for so you can move between quick access, customization and construction.
- Find the sizing and shelf limits of an L-corner unitOpen an L-corner unit's Customize > Rules to see its Sizing Rules and Shelf Restriction tabs, where Available Space holds Min and Max depth, width and height.
- Find your org's default design preferencesOpen Manage Org Preferences from the admin portal to see your org's default design preferences, grouped by category and split across Design, Production and Design MES tabs.
- How appliance sizes affect carcass constructionLearn how carcass panel sizes are computed and how choosing an appliance adjusts the partition to fit it.
- How cabinets outside a room are treatedLearn how cabinets whose maximum portion lies outside the room boundary are handled by room-assignment logic.
- How construction values come from account defaultsSkirting and other construction values are populated from your account's default settings.
- How minimum and maximum depth rules size a unitLearn how minimum depth and maximum depth set the allowed range for a unit's depth, and what happens when neither is set.
- How tall and mid units are defined by heightLearn how tall units are standardised from about 1500 mm up to 2400 mm including the skirting, and that units below that range are mid units.
- Identify and edit a selected cabinet in the selection treeSelect a cabinet to see its unit type and change properties such as width, depth, height, finishes, core material and edge banding.
- Insert a base or wall unit from the toolbar insert menuAdd a cabinet to the design view by picking a base or wall unit from the toolbar insert menu and placing it in the room.
- Insert base units and position them using dimension offsetsPlace base kitchen units, align them to a wall with a dimension offset, adjust their width and set their finishes, core material and edge banding.
- Let standard fittings auto-adjust on height or depth changeChange a unit's height or depth and let the software automatically adjust standard fittings such as hinges, minifix and shelves.
- Make components resize automatically with the cabinetSet the right parameters on a component so it resizes automatically when its parent cabinet or bed changes size.
- Manage default unit placement in preferencesSet default unit placement in the preferences menu so upcoming units and pre-made modular or semi-modular units and extension parameters follow your defaults.
- Open Global Preferences and find a settingOpen the Preferences panel from Global Preferences & Settings and search for the property you want to change.
- Override cabinet dimensions with negative valuesOverride cabinet dimensions such as depth or height by entering negative values when you have access to the sizing rules.
- Place a custom panel in a cabinetAdd a custom panel from the catalogue or with Add Custom Panel, follow the dashed outline and click to commit it.
- Place cabinets without pressing Furnish each timeSelect a cabinet type and its placement options open automatically so you can place it directly, then pick another type to keep placing cabinets.
- Place units by dragging or with the move toolPlace a unit in front of the carcass by dragging it or by using the move (MV) tool once the carcass dimensions are correct.
- Position a loft above wall cabinets using the Y-axisSet the loft's Y-axis to the wall cabinet's Y-axis plus 600 mm so the loft sits correctly above the wall units.
- Replicate customized units by editing modular base unitsStart from a modular furniture base unit and edit it into the customized unit you need.
- Reuse kitchen wall blind corner units in loft designsUse blind corner units from under kitchen wall units in loft designs and hide the panels you do not want there.
- Select all wardrobes together to set total heightSelect all wardrobe units together and update the total height value to set the wardrobe's total height.
- Set cabinet parameters so parametric resizing worksSet each panel's position parameters correctly while creating the cabinet so it can resize parametrically.
- Set cabinet X and Y position values with Z auto-generatedSet only the X and Y position values for a cabinet, where Y is the height from the floor, and let Z be generated automatically.
- Set carcass panel thickness and extend fillers to match itMatch your fillers to the 18 mm carcass panel thickness so they line up flush with the carcass.
- Set default shelf count and height limits via designer input rulesDefine designer input rules in preferences and settings so cabinet heights are checked against a min and max range automatically.
- Set internal finish and profile handles on cabinetsConfigure the internal finish on the left side of the cabinet and choose a profile system with its handle sides and colours.
- Set min/max width rules for double and triple sliding wardrobesConfigure width limits as rules on sliding wardrobe types so users can still choose any size within the allowed range.
- Set mounting height and skirting preferences for new unitsUse elevation and skirting visibility preferences so new units start at the right height with the right skirting shown.
- Set shelf reveal and back panel grooving values as presetsConfigure shelf reveal and back panel grooving values as presets in your account so you do not have to change them repeatedly for each design.
- Set sliding wardrobe depth at the wardrobe levelSet the depth for a sliding wardrobe once at the wardrobe level rather than panel by panel.
- Understand an L-corner unit's dimensions and arm changesLearn which dimensions a placed L-corner unit reports and what happens to its arms and cutouts when you change them.
- Understand cabinet customization levelsLearn how cabinet customization is organized into five levels, from changes that affect the whole cabinet down to individual panels.
- Understand cabinet, wardrobe and custom panel categoriesLearn how Infurnia organises units into three distinct categories: cabinet, wardrobe and custom panel.
- Understand component origin relative to the parent cabinetLearn that a custom panel or component's XYZ origin is relative to its cabinet, not the entire drawing.
- Understand corner unit panel headings and quotation categoriesLearn how a corner unit's panel heading and details differ from other Base Unit, Wall Unit and Tall Unit products and how it appears in the Pricing Quotation.
- Understand frame loft and box loft as kitchen furniture entitiesLearn how kitchen lofts appear as separate entities in the kitchen furniture dropdown and which two variants exist.
- Understand how Infernia treats modular units as BIMLearn how Infernia understands every part of a modular unit such as a cabinet or wardrobe, so shelves can be added or moved.
- Understand how unit width changes are appliedLearn which side of a unit grows or shrinks when you change its width in Infurnia.
- Understand what a carcass is in a cabinetLearn which panels make up a carcass and how it can be modified to build any cabinet type.
- Understand what gets stamped onto a unit when it is addedLearn which materials, finishes, edgebands and settings are applied at insertion and which preference set each unit type reads.
- କୋଣୀୟ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ଆକୃତି ପାଇଁ କଷ୍ଟମ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁମାନକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ଘୂର୍ଣ୍ଣନ କରିବା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତେ ଏକ ଅଲଗା କଷ୍ଟମ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି କୋଣୀୟ କିମ୍ବା ଅଣ-ମାନକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ଆକୃତି ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Use one cabinet model for any custom sizePlace a single saved cabinet model and enter custom dimensions for non-standard sizes instead of creating a new module for each size.
କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ସାମଗ୍ରୀ ଏବଂ ଫିନିଶ81
- Understand how prelam and postlam core boards lock finish sidesLearn how a core board SKU's lamination type decides which panel finishes you can edit and which are bundled from the catalog.
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ସ୍ତରର ଶଟର୍ ଏବଂ କାର୍କାସ୍ ଫିନିଶ୍ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁୟୁନିଟ୍ ଚୟନ କରିବା ପରେ ପ୍ରପର୍ଟିଜ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରୁ ଶଟର୍ ଏବଂ କାର୍କାସ୍ ଫିନିଶ୍ ଏବଂ କୋର୍ ମ୍ୟାଟେରିଆଲ୍ ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ସାମଗ୍ରୀ ଏବଂ ସଂଯୁକ୍ତ ଫିନିଶ ବୁଝନ୍ତୁକ୍ୟାବିନେଟର Materials ଅଧୀନରେ ଥିବା ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ସବ୍-ଟ୍ୟାବରେ କଣ ଅଛି ଏବଂ ସଂଯୁକ୍ତ ଫିନିଶ ଓ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ କିପରି ସ୍ୱୟଂଚାଳିତ ଭାବରେ ଏଜ ବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ଓ ଫିନିଶ ବଦଳାଏ ଦେଖନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ ଶଟରର କୋର ମେଟେରିଆଲକୁ ଗ୍ଲାସକୁ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁଏକ ଶଟର ପ୍ୟାନେଲର କୋର ମେଟେରିଆଲ ସ୍ରୋତକୁ କଷ୍ଟମରେ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏକ ଗ୍ଲାସ ମେଟେରିଆଲ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକାଥରେ ଅନେକ ୟୁନିଟରେ ମେଟେରିଆଲ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକଟିକୁ ସମ୍ପାଦନା ନକରି ଏକାଥରେ ଅନେକ ଚୟନିତ ୟୁନିଟରେ ନୂଆ କୋର ମେଟେରିଆଲ କିମ୍ବା ଫିନିଶ ଲଗାନ୍ତୁ।
- ଆଡମିନ ଟ୍ୟାବ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟର କୋର ମ୍ୟାଟେରିଆଲ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁଆଡମିନ ଟ୍ୟାବରୁ ଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ କିମ୍ବା କର୍ଣ୍ଣର ୟୁନିଟର କୋର ମ୍ୟାଟେରିଆଲ ଅପଡେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସେଟିଂସ ନିଶ୍ଚିତ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ ଚୟନିତ ୟୁନିଟରେ ଲାଗୁ ହେବ।
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (81)
- ଗୋଟିଏ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ର କାର୍କାସ୍ ଫିନିଶ୍ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁନିର୍ବାଚିତ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ର ସମସ୍ତ କାର୍କାସ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ଏକାସାଙ୍ଗରେ ଅପଡେଟ୍ କରିବାକୁ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ସ୍ତରରେ କାର୍କାସ୍ ଫିନିଶ୍ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ, ସେହି ପ୍ରକାରର ଅନ୍ୟ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍କୁ ପ୍ରଭାବିତ ନକରି।
- Change cabinet finishes, core materials and edgebands via Change MaterialsChange a cabinet's finishes and core materials first, then its edgebands, using Change Materials.
- Configure shutter and carcass material thickness and finishes separatelySet the core material and finish for the carcass and the shutter independently so each component carries its own selection.
- Match edge bands and choose custom finishesSet visible edge bands to match the door panel and reserve custom finish for a contrasting colour.
- Change core material and thickness from the carousel and applyPick a core material and its thickness from the carousel and apply the change to your unit.
- Set shutter and carcass core material and thicknessChoose a core material such as BWP, BW or HDMR for shutters and carcasses and give each a thickness, with the back panel defaulting to 6 mm standard material.
- Apply a finish to multiple cabinet parts using the dropdown reuse optionChange a cabinet's finish from the library, then reuse that same finish on other parts like carcass external and carcass internal through the dropdown.
- Change door model, finish and handlePick a door model from the carousel, then set its finish and handle from meshes and materials.
- Change shutter colour at cabinet level and panel finish at panel levelSet the shutter colour for a whole cabinet and the external finish for an individual panel.
- How default finishes and design-level preferences override admin defaultsLearn how freshly added units take their finish from global preferences and why a design's own finish wins.
- Set shutter laminate sides and profile coloursApply shutter laminate to chosen sides and give non-handle profiles a colour.
- Update units that kept old materials after a preference changeBring already-placed cabinets up to date by re-applying shutter, carcass and back-panel core materials.
- Use custom finish and match property to copy a finish onto a panelApply a specific finish to a panel whose external finish is source-driven by selecting the panel, opening external finish source and choosing custom finish.
- Change one panel's material without affecting the unitUnlock a panel property from its source and set a different material on that panel only.
- How shutter colour and per-area colours combine on panelsLearn how the shutter colour sets the base colour of a multi-area panel while areas given their own colour keep it.
- Select a cabinet to open finish and edge-band settingsSelect a cabinet to open its properties panel, then set its finishes, back panel core and edge bands under Materials.
- Change countertop and cabinet material using laminate solidsConfirm the material change by modifying the countertop and applying the changes.
- Change handles and materials for multiple units at onceSelect several units together and swap their finishes in a single action with the change material / interchange control.
- How the back panel material is set and changedLearn how the back panel material defaults to a 6 mm standard board and how to change it when a different thickness or material is required.
- Set finishes and shelf options on a cabinet panel's own levelOpen a cabinet panel's own level to choose where its external and internal finishes come from, pick a custom finish for that panel alone, and set a shelf's type and visibility.
- Apply an already-used material to another elementReuse a material already in your design on another element, either with the material picker or from the material dropdown.
- Apply different colours to a panel design's inner and outer areasCreate a panel design and map its base and applied colours to shutter external, carcass external, shutter or a custom finish so the inner and outer areas show different colours.
- Apply finishes from the house button catalogPick a finish for a unit's shutter or carcass slot from the full house catalog and apply it with a swatch.
- Change a 3D object's material via Meshes and MaterialsOpen Meshes and Materials for a selected 3D object and switch its material to laminate with the finish you want.
- Change a single panel's material from the panel sectionSelect one panel and give it a material of its own, separate from the cabinet-level material.
- Correct a glass shutter and match a panel design finishFix a shutter that inherited a solid core and give a panel design the same finish as the rest of the unit.
- How exposed panel finish is appliedLearn how exposed panels take their finish by default and how to give one a different look.
- How panel thickness is driven by the core materialLearn how a panel's thickness follows from the core material you add to it.
- Link finish material to cabinet with internal and external finishesApply finishes to a cabinet by linking its external and internal finish materials in the finish material properties.
- Set project standards for cabinets and wardrobes in Global PreferencesSet core material, finishes, shutters and handles once at project level so every cabinet and wardrobe you add afterwards defaults to those standards.
- Change a linked panel finish at the individual panel levelMark a panel as custom at the individual panel level so you can change its linked finish or edge band there.
- Change a panel's core material via the material pickerOpen the material picker, select the core material on the page, then set the panel role at panel level.
- Change cabinet internal colour at cabinet levelSelect a cabinet, go to cabinet level and set its internal colour so the change applies to the cabinet internals.
- Change finishes in QC mode and see them in the 3D viewReplace a finish while in QC mode and the 3D view stays in sync with your change.
- Check edge bands and finishes in the material listReview edge bands for shutters and carcass in the material list.
- Configure material and carcass preferences in design preferencesSet material and configuration preferences inside the design application under design preferences.
- How board grain orientation is definedLearn how board width and length map to widthwise and lengthwise grain.
- How drawer finishes inherit carcass finishesLearn how drawer finishes follow the carcass internal and external finish until you change them explicitly at the drawer system level.
- How finish categories control shutter and carcass surfacesLearn how the four finish categories decide which panel surface a finish is applied to and why choosing correctly matters.
- How new cabinets get their default shutter thicknessLearn where the shutter thickness applied to a newly placed cabinet comes from.
- How the back panel material is chosen for a 16 mm HDMR carcassLearn how setting a cabinet carcass to 16 mm HDMR automatically applies a 6 mm HDMR back panel.
- Read and set a panel's inheritance source and edgeband linkingCheck the current source of each material and choose which unit-level channel a panel's edges resolve through.
- Reuse project materials without reopening the catalogueSelect a finish or material already used in the project directly, without picking it from the catalogue again.
- Set shutter and carcass core material and thickness from Quick AccessSet the shutter and carcass core material and its thickness from Quick Access.
- Apply a material to all instances of a repeated componentOpen material settings from the design element's settings panel to push a material across repeated components.
- Assign different core materials to different unit typesGive each unit type its own core material so wall units can differ from base units.
- Assign materials by searching subcategory in the material panelOpen the material or properties panel and select a material to apply it to the selected geometry.
- Change a core from QC mode's Core Materials selectorPick a core from QC mode's Core Materials selector and confirm the change by its toast, then close the core carousel left open at the bottom of the screen.
- Change a material colour via carousel, used-materials dropdown or pickerPick a colour from the carousel, switch between laminate and veneer categories, or reuse a colour already in the design from the used-materials dropdown.
- Change core and finish materials from the properties panelChange core and finish materials from the properties panel.
- Change finish, core material and countertop thickness at unit levelPick a unit's finish and core material from the carousel or dropdown.
- Choose carcass external and internal finishesPick the carcass external finish and the carcass internal finish from their own material pickers in the cabinet's properties panel after selecting the cabinet, with the internal picker setting the inside colour.
- Customize dimensions, materials, finishes and countertop in Quick AccessApply catalog finishes to shutter and carcass faces and pick a countertop from the catalog in Quick Access.
- Do not change cabinet material texture scale or image locallyMaterial texture properties such as the texture image and width/height scale are controlled centrally in the catalogue, so leave them unchanged in the design.
- Find every material used or tried in the designOpen the drop-down on the first line of the third bottom-left panel button to see every material used or tried in the design.
- Find panels not following carcass materialSpot panels whose custom core material does not follow the carcass by looking for the custom core property under the core section.
- Fix a panel that did not follow a cabinet material changeFind out why one panel kept its material and how automation rules and linked SKUs override inheritance.
- How a carcass panel's core is chosenLearn where a carcass panel's core comes from and when the panel keeps its own board.
- How double-sided laminate pasting is countedLearn how the system counts laminate material when it is pasted on both faces of a panel.
- How exposed panels take shutter core and finishLearn what happens to a panel's core material, finish and board layout when you change it to an exposed panel.
- How panel thickness formulas read the cabinet-level core materialLearn where a panel thickness formula such as carcass panel thickness or shutter panel thickness takes its value from.
- Make a panel follow another finishLink a panel's finish slot to another finish so the panel inherits it and updates automatically when that finish changes.
- Make the greyed-out Top switch available in Carcass Panels VisibilitySet Railing Options > Top > Type to 'Full' so the Top switch in Carcass Panels Visibility becomes available, then use the visibility switches to remove the top panel or front skirting panel.
- Override a material colour in design using RGB valuesChange a material's colour for a single design without editing the catalogue by entering RGB values in the texture dropdown.
- Rotate the finish grain or texture on a panelRotate a laminate's grain or texture on a panel face by 0, 90, 180 or 270 degrees from the panel's material section.
- Select core material and edge band for cabinetsChoose the core material and edge band specification for your cabinets, and optionally set skirting finishes.
- Set drawer filler width and match filler panel material thicknessMake a drawer filler panel thicker by giving it its own custom core material so it matches the surrounding 25 mm board.
- Set external finish equal to internal in construction styleLink the external finish to the internal finish in a construction style so both stay the same.
- Set External finish source to shutter external finishSet the External finish source to the shutter external finish so a thick shutter core gets its finish from the right place.
- Set panel visibility and finish per panelSelect the correct panel before changing its finish, because visibility settings apply per panel.
- Understand how panel materials inherit from unit rolesLearn which unit-level material channel each panel role inherits from and when a change flows down to a panel.
- Update panels with Custom Finish after a bulk finish changeChange project finishes in bulk, then update any panel whose finish source is set to Custom Finish one by one on the panel itself.
- Use a finish row's three-dot menu and apply material changes to all instancesOpen a finish row's three-dot menu to clone a material, open Material Settings or reset to default, and see the change on every unit using that finish.
- Use filter by unit SK name to narrow materials in large projectsNarrow the materials shown in the material QC view of a large project by filtering on a key such as unit SK name.
- Use the house button to see the full material catalogueOpen the material or finish picker through the house button so you can reach every available option.
ସଟର ଏବଂ ଦ୍ୱାର149
- କାଚ ଏବଂ ମଧ୍ୟ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ସହିତ ଆଲୁମିନିୟମ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ଶଟର ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁକାଚ କୋର ଏବଂ ମଧ୍ୟ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ସହିତ ଏକ ଆଲୁମିନିୟମ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ଶଟର ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏହାକୁ ଅଲଗା ଅଲଗା ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ବିଭକ୍ତ କରି।
- ଏକ ୟୁନିଟରେ ଏକ ସଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ କନଫିଗୁରେସନ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଏକ ୟୁନିଟ ପାଇଁ ସଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ କନଫିଗୁରେସନ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସଟର ପ୍ରକାର ଓ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ।
- ଫିଙ୍ଗର ଗ୍ରୁଭ ଏବଂ ହ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡେଲଲେସ ଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ ଲଗାନ୍ତୁଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ ଅଧୀନରେ ଥିବା ଶଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମରୁ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ଏବଂ ୱାର୍ଡରୋବରେ ଫିଙ୍ଗର ଗ୍ରୁଭ ଏବଂ ହ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡେଲଲେସ ଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ ଲଗାନ୍ତୁ।
- ଶଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ ସ୍ତରରୁ ଶଟର ହ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡେଲ, ଆକ୍ସେସରୀ, ମେକାନିଜିମ ଏବଂ ଡିଜାଇନ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁଶଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ ସ୍ତରରୁ ଏକ ଶଟରର ହ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡେଲ, ମେକାନିଜିମ ଏବଂ କାଟାଲଗ ଡିଜାଇନ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ।
- Modify Shutter Design ଲାଇବ୍ରେରୀରୁ ଏକ ଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପ୍ରୟୋଗ କରନ୍ତୁଲାଇବ୍ରେରୀରୁ ଏକ ଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଚୟନିତ ଶଟର ପ୍ୟାନେଲଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ ପ୍ରୟୋଗ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯେଉଁଠାରେ ଏହା ସମାପ୍ତ ଆକାରକୁ ସ୍କେଲ୍ ହୁଏ।
- ଏକ ଉଚ୍ଚ ୟୁନିଟ୍କୁ ତଳ କଠିନ ଏବଂ ଉପର ଗ୍ଲାସ୍ ଶଟରରେ ବିଭକ୍ତ କରନ୍ତୁଉପର ଶଟର ମେକାନିଜିମ୍ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ କୋର୍ ମେଟେରିଆଲ୍ ସେଟ୍ କରି ତଳ କଠିନ ଶଟର ଏବଂ ଉପର ଗ୍ଲାସ୍ ଶଟର ସହିତ ଏକ ମିଶ୍ରିତ ଉଚ୍ଚ ୟୁନିଟ୍ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁ।
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (149)
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ଏବଂ ୱାର୍ଡରୋବରେ ଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ ସେଭ କରି ପୁନଃବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁInfurnia ରେ ଏକ ଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ ସେଭ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ modify shutter design ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଏହାକୁ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ଏବଂ ୱାର୍ଡରୋବରେ ଲାଗୁ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟର ଶଟର ପ୍ରକାର କିମ୍ବା ଯନ୍ତ୍ରକୌଶଳ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁକ୍ୟାବିନେଟକୁ ପୁନଃନିର୍ମାଣ ନକରି ଏହାର ଶଟର ପ୍ରକାର କିମ୍ବା ଖୋଲିବା ଯନ୍ତ୍ରକୌଶଳ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ।
- ସମଗ୍ର କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ କିମ୍ବା ଏକକ ପାର୍ଟିସନ୍ରେ ଏକ ସଟର୍ ସିଷ୍ଟମ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଏକ ଖୋଲା କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ରେ ସମଗ୍ର ଭାବରେ କିମ୍ବା କେବଳ ଏକ ପାର୍ଟିସନ୍ରେ ଏକ ସଟର୍ ସିଷ୍ଟମ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ସ୍ତରରେ ଏକ୍ସଟ୍ରୁଡ୍ କରି ଦୁଇ-ଛାୟା ଲାମିନେଟ୍ ଶଟର୍ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ସ୍ତରରେ ଏକ କଷ୍ଟମ୍ ଆକୃତି ଆଙ୍କି ୱାର୍ଡ୍ରୋବ୍ ଶଟର୍କୁ ଦୁଇ-ଛାୟା ଲାମିନେଟ୍ ଫିନିଶ୍ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାକୁ ନ ବଦଳାଇ ଲଗାନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଏହା ନିଜର ଫିନିଶିଂ ପ୍ରକ୍ରିୟା ବହନ କରିବ।
- ସ୍ଲାଇଡିଂ ଶଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ ଭର୍ତ୍ତି କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ ବାହ୍ୟ ଫିନିଶ ଲଗାନ୍ତୁଏକ ସ୍ଲାଇଡିଂ ଶଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ ଭର୍ତ୍ତି କରି, ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଡିଜାଇନ ବିକଳ୍ପଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ କଷ୍ଟମାଇଜ କରି ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ ବାହ୍ୟ ଫିନିଶ ଲଗାଇ ଏକ ୱାର୍ଡରୋବ ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Apply a separate laminate to a specific shutter face areaDefine the shutter shape, then apply a separate laminate to one face area so the rest keeps its default material.
- Change Model ବିକଳ୍ପ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଦ୍ୱାର କିମ୍ବା ୱିଣ୍ଡୋ ପ୍ରକାର ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁସ୍ଥାପିତ ଦ୍ୱାର କିମ୍ବା ୱିଣ୍ଡୋକୁ କାରୋସେଲରୁ ଅନ୍ୟ ମଡେଲ ସହିତ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାର ଆକାର, ହିଞ୍ଜ ପାର୍ଶ୍ୱ ଓ ସ୍ଥିତି ସମାୟୋଜନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ ଶଟରରେ ସାମନା କିମ୍ବା ପଛ ଦର୍ପଣ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଧାର ଅଫସେଟ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଶଟରରେ ଦର୍ପଣ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଦର୍ପଣ ଓ ଶଟର ଧାର ମଧ୍ୟରେ ଥିବା ଫାଙ୍କ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Modify Shutter Design ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ସାଧାରଣ ଶଟରକୁ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ଶଟରରେ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଜ୍ୟାମିତିକୁ ହାତରେ ସମ୍ପାଦନ ନକରି ଶଟର ସେଟିଂସ୍ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ସାଧାରଣ ଶଟରକୁ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ଶଟରରେ ରୂପାନ୍ତର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଶଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ ସେଟିଂସ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ହ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡେଲ ପ୍ରକାର, ଦିଗ ଓ ସ୍ଥିତି ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁହ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡେଲ ପ୍ରକାର ବଦଳାଇବା, ଦିଗ ନିର୍ଧାରଣ କରିବା ଓ ସ୍ଥିତି ବିନ୍ୟାସ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଶଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ ସେଟିଂସ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁ।
- ଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ ପ୍ଲାଏ ଫିନିଶ ଡିସ୍ପ୍ଲେ ସହିତ ପ୍ଲାଏ, ଫିନିଶ ଏବଂ ଏଜ ବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରନ୍ତୁଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ SKU ଉପରେ 'ply finish display' ପ୍ରପର୍ଟି ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହା ନିର୍ଣ୍ଣୟ କରେ ଯେ ଅନ୍ତର୍ନିହିତ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ କଣ ଯୋଗଦାନ କରେ ଏବଂ ଏହାର ଫିନିଶ ଓ ଏଜ ବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ କିପରି ଆଚରଣ କରେ।
- Add a shutter to a partitionGive a partition its own shutter and choose between a single shutter, a double swing or a lift-up.
- Change shutter design and handle at individual shutter levelSelect an individual shutter and use the "Shutter design" option to change its design or handle.
- Create profile shutters via shutter system constructionBuild a profile shutter by adding the required handle and non-handle side profiles from the catalogue in Shutter System Construction.
- Reduce shutter panel width via construction extension parametersNarrow a shutter panel without changing the overall cabinet by adjusting its left and right edge values.
- Add handle profiles via Construction then Shutter ProfileConfigure shutter handle profiles by opening Construction then Shutter Profile and selecting the profile types in the correct sequence.
- Add multiple hinge crank types to the hardware libraryEvery furniture item uses the default hinge unless you switch it to another crank type from the hardware library.
- Choose the opening direction for shuttersLearn which shutter systems offer the Toggle Opening direction control and how to change a corner unit's opening instead.
- Convert a standard wardrobe to sliding by replacing shuttersTurn a standard wardrobe into a sliding wardrobe by deleting its existing shutters and adding a new shutter system configured as two-door or three-door sliding.
- Create glass shutters and add profile handlesTurn a shutter panel into a glass shutter by switching its core material to a glass core in the Customize tab.
- ଦ୍ୱାରର ସ୍ୱିଙ୍ଗ୍ ଓ ହିଞ୍ଜ୍ ଫ୍ଲିପ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ କାନ୍ଥରୁ ଦୂରତା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ସ୍ଥାପିତ ଦ୍ୱାର ଚୟନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାର କେଉଁ ଆଡ଼କୁ ଖୁଲିବ ଓ କେଉଁଠି ହିଞ୍ଜ୍ ରହିବ ତାହା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଏହାର ପାର୍ଶ୍ୱ କିମ୍ବା ହିଞ୍ଜ୍ ଫ୍ଲିପ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Remove or change a shutter handleTake the handle off one shutter or pick a different handle, then adjust its settings in the left panel.
- Use shutter system configuration for profile shuttersChange the glass colour of a profile shutter from the custom core instead of using shutter design.
- Add profile shutters and change handles via shutter system config and catalogAdd a shutter system to a cabinet's parent partition so a shutter is created automatically.
- Change a cabinet's shutter system config from the Customize tabSelect the partition or shutter system and pick the required shutter system from the Customize tab so its config matches the new cabinet structure.
- How cabinet structure splits into shutters, drawers and accessoriesLearn how a cabinet's structure is divided into shutters, drawers and accessories, and how shutter and drawer systems are configured separately.
- Remove a shutter profile or change core materialRemove the handle or non-handle profile from the Shutter Profiles section and change the shutter core material.
- Add a shutter to a single partition via Add Shutter SystemPlace a shutter on just one partition of a cabinet by selecting that partition and choosing Add Shutter System from its options.
- Add, edit and remove shutter systems per partitionManage shutter systems partition by partition, including sizes, removals and replacements.
- Add shutter profiles in shutter system construction settingsSelect the shutter, open its shutter system construction settings, and pick the handle and non-handle profiles from the profile library.
- Change a shutter's opening directionFlip a shutter's hinge side and let the software update the hinge-side manufacturing details for you.
- Choose wardrobe shutter types in unit configurationPick the shutter arrangement you need from the shutter types available in the unit configuration instead of modelling it manually.
- Flip door side, hinge, and two-way opening from door orientationsControl how a selected door opens by flipping its side or hinge, or enabling two-way opening.
- Understand the four finish slots and core materialsLearn which finish slots and core materials a cabinet has and how they feed cutting and pricing.
- Add shelves via partition and shutters via shutter systemAdd a shelf with the partition option and add shutters with the Add Shutter System option, then set the mechanism to single or double swing.
- Align shutters with panels and partitionsAdjust per-edge reductions so shutters sit flush or leave a partition uncovered.
- Change a shutter's opening mechanism via shutter system construction settingsChange how a shutter opens by selecting the shutter mechanism in the shutter system construction settings.
- Change corner unit shutters with shutter designsChange the shutters on a corner unit through shutter designs, since shutter configuration presets cannot be applied to corner cabinets.
- Change frame and glass colour on a cabinet's shuttersChange the glass at the cabinet level through Custom Core, and the frame colour through Shutter System Config, which replaces the whole configuration.
- Control shutter edge visibility with the visible edge band settingSet the shutter visible edge band value to determine which edge band is shown on shutters.
- Customise or remove glass profile shuttersCustomise or remove the shutters on a glass profile to change how the glass looks.
- Gola and profile placementLearn where a gola and a profile are applied in cabinet modelling and how both can appear on the same cabinet.
- How shutter dimensions are calculated from outer sizeLearn how the system derives a shutter's size by subtracting design parameters from the outer dimensions.
- Remove the default shutter design from cabinet preferencesStop a shutter design being applied by default to new cabinet designs by clearing it in admin preferences.
- Set a door's opening direction and two-way openingChoose whether a door is left-opening or right-opening, and enable two-way opening so it opens on both sides.
- Set profile shutter height from profile thicknessConfigure a profile shutter so its height matches the profile thickness, and keep it in sync when that thickness changes.
- Switch a cabinet to profile handles or a handleless doorChange a cabinet from normal handles to profile handles or a handleless door directly during design, with no separate catalogue or construction setup.
- Understand profile dimensions in a profile shutter systemLearn how each profile element's own Dimensions, H and D values change that profile and the glass in a profile shutter system.
- Understand the shutter back gap and hinge screw edge distanceLearn how the 2 mm gap between a shutter and the carcass front affects the hinge screw edge distance.
- Add horizontal divisions to a shutterSplit a shutter into panels with the Divisional Shutter dropdown and see the division in the 3D model.
- Apply a shutter system to a cabinetChoose a swing, sliding or lift-up shutter system and apply it to a cabinet from the customize tab.
- Change a single shutter to a double swing shutterSplit one shutter into two by switching its shutter mechanism to double swing.
- Change cabinet shutter type and opening direction in Shutter System ConstructionSwitch the shutter mechanism between Single Swing and Double Swing, then flip the shutter opening direction from the same panel.
- Change handle placement on a shutterSelect the shutter and set its handle to a position such as Right top or Right middle.
- Change handles on several cabinets at onceMulti-select the cabinets and use the 'modify handle' option in the properties panel to change their handles together.
- Choose shutter mechanism type when applying lift-up shuttersPick the shutter mechanism that matches how you want the shutter to open.
- Create a curved shutter by editing the panel design and cuttingDraw the shutter shape in Edit Panel Design and cut it to the panel thickness to create a curved shutter.
- Delete a shutter handle from the selection treeRemove a handle from a shutter by deleting its entry in the selection tree.
- Divide a wardrobe into main partitions before adding shuttersSplit the wardrobe into main partitions first, then subdivide them for shelves and verticals, and add shutter systems with customised mechanisms afterwards.
- Enable shutter panel for manual dimensioning to measure carcass to shutterMeasure from carcass to shutter in the floor plan by enabling panels for manual dimensioning and selecting the shutter panel.
- Fine-tune handle position with the shift optionMove a placed handle vertically or laterally with the shift option to fine-tune where it sits on the shutter.
- How shutters are reduced by 1mm on all four sidesLearn how the default shutter construction reduces shutters by 1mm on all four sides and applies it automatically.
- Set handle and non-handle profiles on a shutterGive the handle edge and the remaining edges their own profile, thickness and colour.
- Set shutters and drawers to internal finish to keep outer frame visibleMake the outer frame sit outside the shutter face by setting the shutter to internal and the drawer facia to the external finish.
- Toggle opening direction and set lift-up mechanism on tall unitsToggle a tall unit's opening direction and set its mechanism to a single lift-up configuration.
- ପ୍ରସ୍ଥ, ଉଚ୍ଚତା, ମୋଟେଇ ଏବଂ କାନ୍ଥ ଦୂରତା ସହିତ ଦ୍ୱାର ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁଫ୍ଲୋର ପ୍ଲାନରେ ଏକ କାନ୍ଥ ଉପରେ ଏକ ଦ୍ୱାର ରଖନ୍ତୁ, ଏହାର ଆକାର ଏବଂ କାନ୍ଥରୁ ଦୂରତା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ଏହାର ମଡେଲ ଏବଂ ସାମଗ୍ରୀ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Add vertical or horizontal divisions inside a shutterSplit a shutter into sections by adding a vertical or horizontal division in shutter system construction, then select and adjust it.
- Adjust skirting height and shutter system under wardrobe constructionChange the skirting height or shutter system for wardrobes and standard cabinets from the third tab under wardrobe construction options.
- Change drawer facia via drawer level shutter configChange the facia of a drawer by selecting a shutter configuration at the drawer level of the drawer system.
- Change shutter edge-reduction values on shutters already in the designLearn that shutter edge-reduction values are general construction defaults and change them on shutters already in the design with bulk edit.
- Choose drawer system for drawers and shutter system for shutters in constructionConfigure each cabinet front under the right system and construction, drawers under the drawer system and shutters under the shutter system.
- Configure a sliding door with internal shutter system propertiesInsert the sliding mechanism and set the shutter system to internal shutter system in properties to create a sliding door.
- Design a rolling shutter as a shutter designDesign a rolling shutter as a shutter design in the platform and switch between the available shutters when more than one exists.
- How shutter system configuration adapts to any furniture sizeLearn how shutter system configuration applies to any furniture and scales its profiles and glass automatically to the shutter size.
- How the Automatic Shutter Design Picker picks the closest-size designLearn how the Automatic Shutter Design Picker compares designs in the same catalog group and picks the closest size.
- Keep shutter widths within single and double shutter limitsLearn the width limits for single and double shutters and how to divide a single shutter into a double swing shutter.
- ଏକ ଦ୍ୱାର ରଖନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାର ଓସାର, ମୋଟେଇ, ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଓ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସ୍ତର ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ କାନ୍ଥରେ ଏକ ଦ୍ୱାର ରଖନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ବାମ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ଏହାର ଓସାର, ମୋଟେଇ ଓ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Set shutter construction type and divisional profileChoose the shutter construction type and add a divisional profile once the shutter has a division.
- Set the shutter gap for double swing shuttersApply a consistent gap between the two panels of double swing shutters and on corner units.
- Set the shutter width on a blind corner cabinetSee where a blind corner cabinet's shutter width sits alongside its cabinet width, depth and height.
- Understand profile handle placement and defaultsLearn where profile handles can sit and which side or end they default to on wall, base and framed shutters.
- Understand where shutter reductions come fromLearn how the four margin values are set by construction preferences and why each shutter can still differ.
- Use the wall gola profile for wall units, not the base profilePick the wall gola profile when adding a gola profile to a wall cabinet, since the base profile is wrong for wall units.
- Add a basket on the shutter via shutter customizeAdd a separate basket accessory on the shutter panel so a basket appears on the shutter when it opens.
- Apply shutter extension through shutter construction settingsApply the shutter extension over an end panel through the shutter construction settings each time, since it cannot be predefined per unit.
- Attach shutter mechanism hardware and manage its quantityAttach lift-up pistons, flap fittings, sliding rail sets and rolling-shutter mechanisms from the door-system menu, then control how many copies are attached.
- Check a cabinet's shutter hardware mechanism in 3D or via BOQSee that the shutter hardware mechanism is associated with the specific cabinet it is applied to.
- Check shutter settings after correcting shutter reductionsCorrect the shutter reduction in the construction preferences, then check or bulk-edit the shutter settings of units already placed in existing designs.
- Choose a profile or gola handle for a shutterSelect a profile handle such as a gola, J profile or C profile as the handle category to apply.
- Choose a wardrobe shutter configurationSet the wardrobe section to swing, single-shutter or double-shutter to match how its doors open.
- Choose between sliding and swing shutter systemsShutter systems in a cabinet can be configured as sliding or swing mechanisms, and you can remove or change the shutter system independently of the partition position.
- Create a shutter cutout with offset and fillet, then add a glass insetCut a shaped opening in a shutter panel and finish it with a glass inset.
- Create open wall unit panels and set shutter mechanism to noneSet the shutter mechanism to none when the unit is not a shutter.
- Edit door and window dimensions, model, and flip hinges from properties tabSelect a door or window and open the properties tab to change its dimensions, floor elevation, and opening direction.
- Fix a shutter door extending past the cabinet bottom edgeCheck the shutter reduction values in Preferences > Cabinet/Wardrobe > Construction > Shutter System to explain a door that extends past the bottom edge.
- How a vertical gola handle is shared between two unitsSee how a vertical gola handle links two adjacent units, recesses both side panels, and what happens when it is removed.
- How shutter sizing reductions and Shutter Gap work in a construction styleLearn how a construction style reduces every side of a shutter and applies a separate Shutter Gap between the two panels of a double shutter, both set in the construction style preferences.
- Map hinges automatically from shutter heightSet the shutter dimensions and the hinges are mapped for you, with no manual entry.
- Merge shutters and drawer fasciasMake one shutter span several partitions or one fascia span several drawers, and learn what the merge requires.
- Model loft constructions with 0-crank hingesLoft constructions are always modelled with 0-crank hinges.
- Open a shutter in the 3D viewRight-click a shutter in the 3D view to open it.
- Place doors after walls and edit size, height, thickness, hinge and modelAdd doors after your walls are ready, then adjust each door's size, orientation and model so it looks right in 3D.
- Remove a drawer system from a unitRemove the drawer system from a unit and see the unit with no drawer system.
- Remove shutter panel division via panel-level customizationRemove the division on a shutter panel so the shutter shows as a single panel without a split line.
- Resize shutter panels via Reduction, not Extension parametersResize a shutter panel larger or smaller by using the Reduction parameters instead of the Extension parameters.
- Restore a removed shutter system on a partitionAdd a single swing shutter system back to a partition whose shutter system was removed, and see how shutter configurations and reduction settings behave.
- Set door elevation and shift a door in its propertiesLearn where elevation sits in the door properties panel, why a door's elevation is zero, and how to shift the door along either direction.
- Set drawer-fascia reductionsShrink drawer fascias from the drawer's construction settings and create gaps next to fillers.
- Set placement for a normal knob or bar handleUse the 9-position grid and orientation choice to place a normal knob or bar handle, including on gas-lift systems.
- Set the gap between shuttersSelect the shutter in the tree, open the shutter system, and set the gap value on the construction tab.
- Sliding door panel sizing and construction parametersLearn how sliding shutter panels are sized and how the construction parameters control how the tracks and panels sit relative to the carcass.
- Use FR shortcut to create a wardrobe designStart a wardrobe design with the FR shortcut, then place double swing shutters and manage internal carcass elements.
- Add a partition configuration to a wardrobe with or without shuttersAdd an internal layout to the root partition whether the shutters are still on or have been removed.
- Add finger group details for sliding door top and bottom in hardware adminEdit construction elements and shutter offsets for sliding door top and bottom finger group details.
- Apply 3D shutter designs to cabinets via modify shutter designsApply 3D shutter designs to cabinets through modify shutter designs, where glass designs also support autoscaling.
- Apply a G profile as a handle on sliding wardrobe shuttersApply a G profile handle to a sliding wardrobe shutter through the normal handle application flow for the shutter.
- Change shutter reductions per sideEnter reduction amounts on the left, right, top and bottom shift fields to resize a shutter.
- Check why a shutter edge has no edgeband with a Gola handleLearn how a Gola, profile or finger-groove handle can replace the edgeband on the shutter edge it sits on, and how to tell that from a defect.
- Choose shutter design options in the shutter system propertySet the shutter design options in the shutter system property, since shutter and drawer systems share properties except for construction.
- Convert a shutter to a plain panel by setting mechanism to noneMake a panel without a cabinet shutter by setting the shutter system mechanism to none, then set its construction parameters.
- Edit shutter gaps in bulk and undo extensionsChange the Shutter Gap across several units at once and remove unwanted shutter extensions.
- Finger groove panel handles on base unitsApply an FGP handle so its groove is cut into base-unit shutters and the carcass adapts, and learn where it works and where a custom panel is needed.
- How gola and FGP handles shrink shutters and drawersLearn how gola and finger-groove handle items automatically shorten shutters and drawer fronts through reduction values set on the handle item.
- How hardware positioning and shutter reductions workLearn how the platform handles hardware positioning on shutters and shutter reductions as built-in features for modular furniture.
- How profile handles default to top on base units and bottom on wall unitsLearn where a profile handle sits by default on base and wall unit shutters and when the handle placement property overrides it.
- How shutters are treated as external or internalLearn how the shutter system property treats shutters as external by default and what changes when you mark one as internal.
- Model a pocket door systemModel a pocket door system in the software, noting that its slide animation is not automated.
- Modify shutters, handles, drawers and materials from the property tabChange shutters, handles, drawers and materials from the property tab and see each change apply in a click.
- Open and close all shutters on a 3 Door Sliding Shutter systemSlide every door of a 3 Door Sliding Shutter system open or back from the Shutter System panel's Construction tab.
- Open and close drawers and shutters in a designOpen a drawer or shutter to see it move and stay that way when the design is reopened.
- Open construction to reach shutter profilesOpen construction to reach shutter profiles such as non-handle and handle profiles.
- PU ଶଟର ଏବଂ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ ଡ୍ରୟରରୁ ଏଜ୍ ବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ହଟାନ୍ତୁPU ଶଟର କିମ୍ବା ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ ଡ୍ରୟରରୁ ମ୍ୟାପ୍ ହୋଇଥିବା ଏଜ୍ ବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ହଟାନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ସେହି ଅଂଶଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ ଏଜ୍ ବାଇଣ୍ଡିଂ ଆଉ ଦେଖାଯିବ ନାହିଁ।
- Restore a deleted shutter systemRe-add a removed shutter system by selecting the partition and using Add Shutter System, or bring it back with Ctrl+Z straight after the removal.
- Rotate a handle only when its SKU has a left/right optionFlip or rotate a shutter handle only if its SKU offers a left/right orientation option, then set it horizontal or vertical.
- Set handle position on selected shutters after Modify HandleApply a handle to several selected cabinets or wardrobes through Modify Handle, then set the handle position for the selected shutters.
- ଶଟର ସିଷ୍ଟମକୁ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣରେ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଖୋଲିବା ଦିଶା ଟୋଗଲ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ ଶଟର ବାହ୍ୟ ପ୍ରକାର ପରି ସେହି ନୀତିରେ କାମ କରେ।
- Set the shutter reduction for a J profile drawerSet the shutter reduction to 30 when you use a J profile drawer.
- Snap lofts carcass-to-carcass, not shutter-to-shutterAlign loft units by their carcasses rather than their shutters, since shutters carry a 2 mm gap between them.
- Understand handle carousel categories and handle coloursLearn how the handle carousel groups Gola Handles, Handles and Profile Handles, and why each handle colour appears as its own card.
- Understand the fixed main partition in a rolling shutter moduleLearn that a rolling shutter module's main partition is fixed and cannot be adjusted through the reduction parameters.
- Understand what the shutter back gap setting affectsLearn that the shutter back gap setting only changes 3D visualization and leaves cut lists and production data unchanged.
- Understand which parts can be animatedLearn that animation in the platform is restricted to shutter and drawer systems only.
- Use a shutterless box behind a unit for support panelsUse a shutterless box behind a unit to provide the support structure without a visible shutter.
ଡ୍ରୟର ଏବଂ ଡ୍ରୟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ108
- ଡ୍ରୟରର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ବାସ୍କେଟ କିମ୍ବା କଟଲେରୀ ଟ୍ରେ ପରି ଡ୍ରୟର ଇନସର୍ଟ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁଏକ ଡ୍ରୟରର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସମାୟୋଜିତ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏହାର ପ୍ରକାର ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ୱାୟାର ବାସ୍କେଟ କିମ୍ବା PVC କଟଲେରୀ ଟ୍ରେ ପରି ଇନସର୍ଟ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- ଡ୍ରୟର ସ୍ତରରେ ଡ୍ରୟରର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଏବଂ ଗଭୀରତା ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁଡ୍ରୟରଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଚୟନ କରି ସେମାନଙ୍କର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଏବଂ ଗଭୀରତା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏକାସାଙ୍ଗରେ ଅନେକଟିକୁ ସମାୟୋଜନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ Bottom Elevation ସହିତ ଏକ ଡ୍ରୟରକୁ ତଳକୁ ଘୁଞ୍ଚାନ୍ତୁ।
- ପାର୍ଟିସନରୁ ଏକ ଡ୍ରୟର ସେଟ୍ ଏବଂ ଅତିରିକ୍ତ ଡ୍ରୟର ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁପାର୍ଟିସନ ସ୍ତରରେ ଏକ ଡ୍ରୟର ସେଟ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଅତିରିକ୍ତ ଡ୍ରୟର ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକର ଫେସ୍ ଓ ବକ୍ସ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଅଲଗା ଭାବରେ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ପାର୍ଟିସନ୍ ସ୍ତର ଏବଂ ଡ୍ରୟର ସେଟ୍ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ରେ ଏକ ଡ୍ରୟର ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ର ପାର୍ଟିସନ୍ ସ୍ତରରୁ ଏହାର ଭିତରେ ଏକ ଡ୍ରୟର ଭର୍ତ୍ତି କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଏହାର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହେଲେ ତଳେ ଏକ ସେଲଫ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- ସଟର ହଟାଇ ଏବଂ ଏକ ସେଲ୍ଫ ଜୋନ ଯୋଡ଼ି ୱାର୍ଡରୋବର ବାହ୍ୟ ଡ୍ରୟର ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁୱାର୍ଡରୋବରେ ବାହ୍ୟ ଡ୍ରୟର ତିଆରି କରିବା ପାଇଁ ବିଦ୍ୟମାନ ସଟର ହଟାନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏକ ସେଲ୍ଫ ଜୋନ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- ବକ୍ସ ଡ୍ରୟର ନିର୍ମାଣ ଏବଂ ଏହାର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଅଫସେଟ ବୁଝନ୍ତୁSee how box drawers hang from the top with explicit heights and per-drawer offsets, and how box height relates to fascia height.
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (108)
- Add drawers ସାଧାରଣ ବକ୍ସ ଡ୍ରୟର କିମ୍ବା ଡ୍ରୟର ସେଟ୍ ସହିତAdd drawers ସାଧାରଣ (ବକ୍ସ) ଡ୍ରୟର ଭାବରେ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ସଂଖ୍ୟକ ଡ୍ରୟର ସହିତ କିମ୍ବା ଡ୍ରୟର ସେଟ୍ ଭାବରେ, ଏବଂ ଡ୍ରୟର ୟୁନିଟ୍ ପାଇଁ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଓ ଗଭୀରତା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ବକ୍ସ ଡ୍ରୟରକୁ ସୁଇଚ୍ କରିବା ପରେ ଡ୍ରୟର ସେଟିଂସ୍ ପୁନଃ ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଡ୍ରୟରକୁ ସାଧାରଣରୁ ବକ୍ସ ପ୍ରକାରକୁ ବଦଳାଇବା ପରେ ଡ୍ରୟର-ସ୍ତରୀୟ ସେଟିଂସ୍ ପୁନଃ ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଉଚ୍ଚତା, ଅଫସେଟ୍ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ବିବରଣୀ ସଠିକ୍ ରହିବ।
- Control drawer depth via Customize and the channelSet the channel depth for a drawer and fit it into the cabinet with the right panel thickness and fillers.
- ଖୋଲିବା ସ୍ଥାନଠାରୁ ଅଧିକ ଉଚ୍ଚ ଡ୍ରୟର ବକ୍ସ ଠିକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଡ୍ରୟର ଫିଟ୍ ହେବା ପାଇଁ ଡ୍ରୟର ଖୋଲିବା ସ୍ଥାନଠାରୁ ବଡ଼ ଡ୍ରୟର ବକ୍ସ ଉଚ୍ଚତା କମାନ୍ତୁ।
- How drawer systems work in cabinetsLearn how drawer systems are configured at the drawer level, including choosing mechanism types and mixing hardware per drawer.
- Add and configure internal drawers in a wardrobeAdd an internal drawer to a wardrobe by defining the partition height, setting the drawer to internal and box type, and aligning fillers with the shutter thickness.
- Configure external drawer sets with one, two or three drawersAdd external drawers from the subcategory and warehouse, then adjust drawer height, box height and bottom panel offset.
- How drawer-set fillers workLearn how fillers are added to tandem and wooden drawer sets and how each side can be changed on its own.
- Use add drawer set for production-ready wardrobe drawersAdd production-ready drawers inside a wardrobe or cabinet by using the add drawer set option and setting the partition height to fit it.
- Add and size accessory objects in drawersAdd baskets, tandem boxes and other drawer hardware, then size and position them by turning auto-scale on or off.
- Add an internal tandem drawer set and recess it with an offsetAdd a Draw Set to a partition, clear a blocking hinge with a left filler, and recess the drawer by setting its offset from the front.
- Add extra drawers via drawer system customizationAdd more drawers to a cabinet by setting the number of additional drawers in the drawer system customization option.
- Add or change drawer fillers from Drawer System construction settingsAdd left or right fillers to a drawer, set their width, and remove the one that clashes in sliding-shutter units.
- Choose a drawer filler typePick between both-side, left-side and right-side filler when you add drawers.
- Configure drawer channel via draw level customizationSet the drawer channel from the draw level in the channel library, then adjust its width and depth.
- Convert a drawer to a wire basket or add a cutlery tray insertChange a drawer into a wire basket or add a cutlery tray insert, choosing sizes that match the cabinet.
- Convert a full-height shutter into drawersTurn a full-height shutter into drawers by removing it from the shutter system and adding drawers at partition level.
- Create an internal drawer by turning off fascia and extending shutterAdd a normal drawer, turn off its fascia so it has no front, then extend the shutter fascia above it to cover the opening.
- Fix drawer height errors and drawers that hit the carcassUnfix affected drawers so the system recalculates, and reduce box height when a drawer collides with the carcass.
- Make a drawer internal and box type in drawer systemsConvert a newly added external drawer into an internal drawer and size the space it sits in to match the drawer height.
- Set a custom drawer depth with a channel fittedUse the Depth Reduction in the drawer's Other Parameters to make a drawer shallower than the cabinet while a channel stays fitted.
- Set and change a filler's width on the drawer systemAdd a left or right filler from the cabinet's drawer system and set how much space it takes by editing its Filler Width.
- Set box drawer parameters and channelsSet the bottom panel offset and default drawer depth per wardrobe, and add a channel matching the drawer depth.
- Size tandem drawers and box drawersLet the tandem brand/model specification set the bottom and back panel sizes, and know where drawer depth is editable.
- Tell internal and external drawers apart by placementLearn how internal and external drawers differ by where they sit, and how drawers can be added with both-side, left-side or right-side fillers depending on the wardrobe type.
- Work out drawer depth from the selected channelTrace how the drawer depth follows the channel depth minus the Depth Reduction, and why the channel is chosen manually.
- Add a drawer set from the partition's quick access menuAdd external or internal drawers to a partition and place LHS and RHS drawer sets side by side correctly.
- Add a handle at drawer level with the drawer handle selectorAssign a handle to a single drawer, or to several cabinets at once, without touching placement or orientation settings.
- Add a telescopic channel to a drawerAdd a telescopic runner to a drawer by choosing the telescopic option from the channel list in the cabinet's customize middle section.
- Add drawers by selecting the partition, not by undoingAdd one or more drawers to a unit by selecting the partition where each drawer should sit and entering the quantity.
- Add drawers individually or as drawer setsAdd drawers one at a time or as pre-measured drawer sets, created in Admin under Furniture > Drawer Sets.
- Add drawers on both sides of a unitAdd a vertical panel first, then add the drawers on each side so drawers can sit on both sides of the unit.
- Add fillers to a drawer system with hinged shuttersAdd fillers to a drawer system used with hinged shutters so the parts do not collide, then trim the default three panels to suit.
- Add or re-add drawer accessories at drawer levelOpen the drawer system and drawer construction at drawer level to add accessories such as tandem hardware.
- Add or remove drawers from drawer system customizationAdd extra drawers at system level or remove a single drawer at drawer level.
- Apply a channel at drawer-system or drawer levelChoose whether a channel applies to every drawer in a system or to a single drawer, and re-check widths on drawers modelled without channels.
- Assign a drawer channel from the drawer channel dropdownChoose the drawer channel for a cabinet from the drawer channel dropdown in the drawer settings.
- Build drawer and basket units at partition levelAdd drawers and baskets at the internal partition level and size them to match the partition.
- Change drawer depth from 450 to 400Change the default drawer depth in the cabinet design module to 400 depending on the channel used.
- Choose drawer filler options on the shutter sideWhen configuring a drawer, choose fillers on both sides, a left-side filler or a right-side filler.
- Edit drawer depth in box and other drawer constructionsChange the drawer depth in box drawer construction through the editable Default Drawer Depth value, while other constructions keep the Drawer Depth field disabled.
- Position the drawer and fascia with offsetsSet the offset to a specific value and place the fascia where you want it rather than only at the bottom.
- Set drawer heights, front panel reduction and carcass 1mm reductionConfigure the drawer settings structure and drawer-level construction with the required heights, then set the front panel reduction at drawer level.
- Add drawer sets to sliding wardrobesConfigure drawer sets for a sliding wardrobe in your design.
- Add or remove drawers from a partition via drawer system controlsAdd drawers to a partition from the partition section and remove them from the drawer system, while also adding shelves or vertical partitions.
- Apply and remove drawer handles per drawerConfigure each drawer with its own handle instead of one common handle for the whole unit.
- Apply a shelf reveal of 20 or 25 to the shutter spaceApply a shelf reveal of 20 or 25 to the shutter space so the shelves and partitions are set before you add a drawer set.
- Create side-by-side drawers by insetting the vertical panelSplit a section into halves with a fixed shelf and vertical, assign a drawer set to each half, then hide the vertical by moving the panel inward.
- Customize drawer height, channel and bottom panel thicknessAdjust the drawer height, channel settings and bottom panel thickness so the drawer construction matches the required dimensions.
- Drawer bottom elevation is 12 and construction setting is 20Connectors are already present in the construction.
- How drawer depth is derived from the constructionLearn why the drawer channel properties show Channel Depth, Channel Width and partition depth but no drawer depth field, and where drawer depth comes from instead.
- How drawer fronts behave over a split verticalLearn how a drawer front spans a vertical when a drawer set sits in one half of a split section, and how it changes once the other half gets one.
- How drawers default to internal or externalLearn which drawers are internal or external by default and how to switch a drawer between the two.
- How the drawer bottom panel is grooved into the drawer sidesLearn how Infurnia grooves the drawer bottom panel into the drawer sides, including the four-sided grooving used in wooden drawer construction.
- Set left and right filler widths for box-type drawer constructionSet an editable Left Filler Width and Right Filler Width alongside the filler gap in the drawer-system construction area, and these fillers and widths apply to box-type drawer construction as well.
- Set the section height for a drawer above a shutterAdd a shelf at partition level and set the section height so the drawer above a shutter comes out at the height you want.
- Add side-by-side drawers with a vertical partitionCreate side-by-side drawers by placing one vertical partition between them and sizing it to the drawer height.
- Compare tandem box and none drawer panel constructionSee which wooden panels a tandem box drawer has and which a none drawer has.
- Configure tandem drawer system and set box heightCreate a one-drawer drawer set, switch it to a tandem internal drawer, and set its facial and box height at drawer level.
- Control drawer front position with offset valuesSet the offset values to control how the drawer front sits relative to the cabinet opening.
- Convert a drawer into a keyboard tray by turning off fasciaTurn off the fascia option in the drawer level settings so the drawer front is removed and the unit reads as an open keyboard tray.
- Position a drawer box with bottom elevation and bottom panel offsetRaise the drawer box above the shutter bottom with bottom elevation and fine-tune the bottom panel with its offset, remembering that the offset reduces the drawer box height.
- Set drawer tandem hardware at drawer levelChoose the tandem or drawer hardware for a drawer unit from the drawer level, using the SKUs configured in the catalogue.
- Size a drawer to fit a carcass with a back panelWork out the usable internal depth of a carcass so a drawer fits without hitting the back panel.
- Understand default 1 mm cabinet reductionsLearn how every cabinet is reduced by 1 mm on all four sides under drawer-level construction by default.
- Work out usable drawer depth in a wardrobeSize a wardrobe drawer by subtracting the shelf reveal, back panel offset, back panel thickness and drawer fascia thickness from the cabinet depth.
- Add Drawers vs Drawer Set, and normal vs box type drawersLearn how Add Drawers spreads drawers equally within a partition and how normal drawers adjust to partition height.
- Apply box construction with channels to a drawer systemCreate a drawer set with channels on the admin portal, then switch the construction dropdown to Box Type at drawer level.
- Change drawer channels in the design portal with multi-selectSelect multiple items in the design portal and change their drawer channels in one go.
- ଡ୍ରୟର ପ୍ୟାନେଲରୁ ଡ୍ରୟର ଫାସିଆ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁଡ୍ରୟର ପ୍ୟାନେଲରୁ ଏକ ଭିନ୍ନ ଡ୍ରୟର ଫାସିଆ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ।
- Clone a configured drawer to replicate its settingsUse cloning to copy a configured drawer's construction, channel, accessories and settings across a drawer system.
- Create a handleless drawer using a finger groove cutApply a profile or gola handle from the handle options when you want a handle instead of a finger groove cut.
- Create side-by-side drawers manually with a vertical partitionBuild side-by-side drawers by adding a shelf and a vertical partition, then placing a drawer on each side.
- Drawer heights auto-fit within available clear heightDrawer heights auto-fit to the available clear height of the cabinet opening.
- Find TV base and TV drawer units in multi-purpose modular furnitureLocate TV base and TV drawer units, in single or double door and short, 450 or 600 heights, under the multi-purpose modular furniture section.
- How changing a drawer accessory type rebuilds the drawerLearn what happens to a drawer when you change its accessory type, including how fascia reduction values and tandem changes are handled.
- See which drawer inputs a channel or tandem item locksFind out which drawer inputs become read-only once a channel or tandem box item declares its own dimensions.
- Set front panel and bottom panel extensionsSet the front panel extension and per-side bottom panel extension in the drawer construction preferences.
- Set per-drawer top and bottom reductions in drawer modulesConfigure drawer modules with individual top and bottom reduction values for each drawer instead of one value for the whole module.
- Set the drawer system deduction to 2 mm for more clearanceIncrease the drawer system deduction from its 1 mm default to 2 mm so the drawer gets more clearance and moves more easily.
- Toggle drawer side panels on or off via panel visibility settingsShow or hide a drawer's side panels by selecting the drawer and using its panel visibility options.
- Understand tandem drawer bottom thickness and drillingTandem drawer bottom panels are handled automatically at the standard 18mm thickness, and applying a tandem drawer system generates its drilling automatically.
- Add a basket to a drawer in an insert collectionAdd the drawer first, then apply the basket option, keeping in mind that a basket cannot be combined with tandem box drawers in the same insert collection.
- Add a drawer by attaching it to a shelf in the space partitionPlace a drawer inside a compartment by first adding a shelf at the required height and then attaching the drawer to that shelf in the space partition.
- Add a drawer insert such as PVC cutlery from drawer levelAdd an insert like a PVC cutlery tray to a drawer by picking its type and the size closest to the drawer.
- Add drawers at any height in a wardrobeAdd a drawer at the top of a wardrobe without being limited by the module's height.
- Add internal drawers behind wardrobe shuttersAdd drawers on a partition and switch the new Drawer System's Properties > Type to Internal so the drawers sit behind the shutters.
- Adjust non-standard drawer sizes with an extension valueFit drawers to non-standard openings by applying an extension value to match the client's requirements.
- Adjust panel-level reduction to resize an external drawerChange the panel-level reduction parameter with a minus value to make an external drawer larger.
- Bulk edit drawer carcass thickness and set defaultSet the drawer carcass thickness for all drawers at once, knowing individual drawers can still be overridden later if a different thickness is needed.
- Change drawer facial configuration in drawer system settingsOpen the drawer system settings and change the facial configuration there to update a drawer.
- Change drawer runners to ball-bearing via drawer-level CustomizeSelect an individual drawer, go to the drawer level and use Customize to change its channel to another runner type such as ball-bearing.
- Choose between normal and box drawers in a drawer systemLearn how a normal drawer auto-calculates its balance space and how to switch a drawer type back to normal.
- How pull-out drawer width is reduced by channel widthLearn how a pull-out drawer's width is reduced by twice its Default Channel Width, and how tandem box drawers take their side gap from the tandem box instead.
- Restore a drawer's 1:1 ratio by setting height back to autoSwitch a drawer's height from fixed back to auto-calculated to return it to the original 1:1 ratio.
- ଏହାର ଇନସର୍ଟ, ବାସ୍କେଟ କିମ୍ବା ଉଚ୍ଚତା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରିବାକୁ ଏକ ଡ୍ରୟର ଚୟନ କରନ୍ତୁଇନସର୍ଟ, ବାସ୍କେଟ ଏବଂ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ପାଇଁ ଏହାର କାଟାଲଗ ବିକଳ୍ପ ଦେଖାଯିବା ପାଇଁ ଡ୍ରୟର ଉପାଦାନକୁ ନିଜେ ଚୟନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Set default drawer height and channel lengthConfigure a standard drawer height default with its matching internal drawer body, and set the default drawer channel length in the admin hardware drawer sets.
- Switch a drawer back to auto-sizing to free the fixed-height constraintTurn off a drawer's fixed-height switch so it returns to auto-sizing and another drawer can take a fixed height.
- Understand the standard cabinet drawer division ratioLearn the drawer division ratio used for a standard cabinet with a normal handle.
- Understand the three editable drawer levelsLearn how a drawer is split into the drawer system level, the drawer level and the panel level, each editable on its own.
- Understand what a two-drawer medium unit providesLearn what a two-drawer medium unit gives you in kitchen drawer units.
- Use drawer sets instead of manual construction for side-by-side drawersBuild side-by-side drawer layouts with the drawer sets feature so channels and components stay consistent.
ସେଲ୍ଫ, ପାର୍ଟିଶନ ଏବଂ ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ87
- ପାର୍ଟିସନ, ସେଲ୍ଫ ଓ ଡ୍ରୟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ୱାର୍ଡ୍ରୋବର ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ ଅଂଶ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁୱାର୍ଡ୍ରୋବର ପାର୍ଟିସନ ଭିତରେ Add shelves, ଡ୍ରୟର ସିଷ୍ଟମ ଓ ନିର୍ମାଣ ବିକଳ୍ପ ଯୋଡ଼ି ଏହାର ଆଭ୍ୟନ୍ତରୀଣ ଅଂଶ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Build a wardrobe internal with shelves, drawers and hanger rodsAdd a shelf, drawer, vertical, hanger rod and pull-out hanger rod in the right order to build a wardrobe internal.
- Change partition dimension instead of translating a shelfAdjust a cabinet by manipulating partition levels, add a shutter system at the partition level, and avoid translating a shelf so the shelf still matches the partition layout.
- Add drawers, shutters and shelves at partition levelAdd a drawer set, shutter system or shelf at partition level and set each drawer's height and accessory type and the shutter mechanism.
- Add wardrobe internals, drawer sets and mirrorsComplete a wardrobe interior by adding vertical partitions, shelves, hanging accessories, drawer sets and shutter mirrors.
- Adjust shelf reveal at partition or panel levelChange the shelf reveal at partition level or move a single shelf's front edge at panel level so internal shelves clear a clash.
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (87)
- Set shelf reveal to zero for external shutters and drawersSet the shelf reveal to zero so external shutters and drawers are not offset by the internal shelf spacing.
- Set wardrobe shelf and hinge reveals larger than 5 mmChoose a shelf reveal large enough that wardrobe shelves and hinges do not collide, then check it against the hinge positions.
- Add shelves in a partition and set shelf reveal to zeroAdd shelves to a selected partition space and set the shelf reveal to zero so there is no gap from the front side.
- Build wardrobe internals yourself from an empty carcassPlace a wardrobe option from the catalogue and build its internals yourself using shelves and vertical panels or a ready-made partition configuration.
- Set drawer fascia height by adjusting partition dimension with a negative offsetSee how the partition height shown is the full height minus the panel thickness when you set drawer fascia height with a negative offset.
- Add a vertical partition and drawers on either sideChoose which side a vertical partition goes on, then add and configure drawers on each side once the vertical and shelves are in place.
- Align a shelf between a shutter and a drawerLearn where a shelf sits by default between a shutter and a drawer and how to shift its alignment by adjusting the extension.
- Lock a partition section and set its heightSwitch a partition section to fixed, give it exact dimensions and add fixed shelves at that level.
- Set shelf reveal and front gap to zero for flush shelvesEdit the shelf reveal and the front gap in the shelf/panel construction settings on the left-hand panel to make shelves sit flush.
- Set shelves above and below drawers as fixedSet the shelves above and below the drawers in a wardrobe as fixed rather than adjustable.
- Set shelves as fixed or adjustableChoose Fixed Shelf or Adjustable Shelf per shelf panel and mix fixed and adjustable shelves in one unit.
- Use pre-made internal configurations that auto-resize to the wardrobeAdd internal wardrobe configurations through the customize option and adjust one shelf height to let the remaining shelves resize automatically.
- Work with separate partitions in a wardrobeSelect each partition of a divided wardrobe on its own so you can add a shutter to just one zone or change its shelves without touching the others.
- Add shelves and hanging space by clicking on partitionsClick a partition to add shelves and hanging space inside a wardrobe, and plan around drawers at the bottom.
- Configure hinge dimensions for hinge-shelf collision detectionConfigure the dimensions for every hinge type individually so hinge-shelf collisions can be detected.
- Customize wardrobe partitions, shelves and zonesArrange partitions, shelves and zones to match the customer's requirement, including long hanging space or a drawer configuration.
- Manually change wardrobe construction and turn off back skirtingCustomize a wardrobe by manually changing its construction and turning off the back skirting for a sliding wardrobe.
- Set fixed height to control partition division and add drawersDivide a cabinet partition with a shelf or vertical partition, set a fixed height on a section to size it, then add a hanging rod or shelf.
- Set shelf reveal on partitionsSet the partition-level shelf reveal distance and control how it applies to nested and SKU partitions.
- Split an L-corner partition into Front Major or Side MajorSplit the L-corner partition, add shelves to each section and align the panel dimensions.
- Understand partitions and add shelves, panels or drawers inside a cabinetLearn what a partition is in Infurnia and add shelves, vertical panels or drawers at the partition level.
- Why a shelf or partition cannot be deletedLearn why a shelf or partition panel may be protected from deletion and how to work around it.
- Add a hanging route via construction customizeAdd a hanging route to a wardrobe by opening construction customization on the top, selecting the hanging route option and picking it from the catalogue.
- Add partitions and glass inside a cabinet zoneSplit a cabinet interior equally by adding a partition in the empty space inside the cabinet zone.
- Add shelves, shutters and hangers at partition levelAdd components to a selected partition so they apply only to that portion of the cabinet.
- Build the internal layout partition by partitionAdd shelves, vertical partitions, drawers and accessories on a partition basis in the right order.
- Change a shelf from adjustable to fixedShelves added at partition level start out adjustable, and you can make one fixed by changing its type at panel level.
- Choose a predefined partition configurationPick a ready-made layout whose filler side matches the requirement instead of dropping individual units.
- Choose fixed or adjustable shelves in shelf panel settingsDecide whether each shelf stays permanently in position or can be removed and repositioned, and set shelves as fixed for a clean drawer look.
- Choose how to add shelves so halves stay independent or equally dividedLearn how adding shelves one at a time versus all at once changes whether sections stay independent or re-adjust equally when you edit them.
- Create and reuse fixed wardrobe module layoutsSet up wardrobe modules as fixed layouts so their arrangement stays the same across drawings.
- Dimension internal cabinet partitions with skeleton modeTurn on skeleton mode to add internal partition dimensions, or dimension partitions by hand instead.
- Divide shelf and vertical spaces equally or by exact dimensionAdd shelves and verticals that split space equally by default, or select a space and enter an exact dimension to divide it unequally.
- Edit wardrobe width, height and depthChange a wardrobe's width, height and depth and let the internal layout adjust automatically.
- Find wardrobe hangers for a hanging sectionLocate wardrobe hangers as an accessory under the partition level in the hanging section, where non-branded hangers are already available in the store.
- Handle back panels and bulk shelf revealTurn off an oversized carcass back panel and apply one shelf reveal across several wardrobes.
- How adjustable shelves are sized differently from fixed shelvesLearn why adjustable shelves are made slightly narrower than fixed shelves and how that changes when a shelf is set to fixed.
- How partition sections are auto-sized and lockedUnderstand how auto and fixed partition sections share space and why one section always stays auto.
- How the default shelf reveal distance worksLearn what the shelf reveal distance is set to by default and why you note it when creating catalogue entries.
- Front shift ସହିତ କାନ୍ଥରୁ ଆଗକୁ ପାର୍ଟିସନ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଅଫସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁକାନ୍ଥରୁ ଆଗକୁ ଏକ ଅଫସେଟ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ ଯାହାଫଳରେ ପାର୍ଟିସନ, ରାଫ୍ଟର ଏବଂ ଅଙ୍କିତ ପ୍ୟାଟର୍ନଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଆପଣ ଚାହୁଁଥିବା ଦୂରତାରେ ରହିବ।
- Remove vertical partition before adding a shelf in the structurePlace a shelf where a vertical partition currently sits by removing the partition first, adding the shelf, then returning to the vertical partition step.
- Set a partition to fixed height to change its heightMake one partition taller or shorter by switching it to fixed height and entering the height you need.
- Set custom partition sizes using fixed width or fixed heightGive a partition its own size by switching it from equal division to a fixed width or fixed height and entering the value you need.
- Set partition width and height using internal-to-internal measurementSet a wardrobe partition's width or height by its internal-to-internal measurement so you control the clear opening between panels.
- Set the partition offset distance inside a carcassLearn what the partition offset value means when you add a partition inside a carcass, so you inset the partition by a distance instead of setting its thickness.
- Split top and bottom panels per vertical partitionSplit a cabinet's top and bottom panels into one piece per vertical section so each piece follows its section width and edge pieces extend over the sides automatically.
- Use quick presets to add standard internal layoutsPick a ready-made internal layout preset and add fillers on either side of it.
- Add a hanger rod via the customize button, not quick accessAdd a hanger rod to your design by choosing it and using the house button.
- Add a ready-made internal layout to a cabinet partitionGive a client ready-made internal options by adding a pre-made layout to a cabinet partition, then fine-tune individual panels.
- Add a shelf above a shutter by hiding the appliance and using the partitionAdd the shelf at the partition level so it matches the arrangement used in similar units.
- Add a shell and verticals to an empty wardrobe carcassAdd a shell and verticals to an empty wardrobe carcass, then find the partition options in the selection tree on the left-hand side.
- Add base and loft shelves via partition dimensions using clear heightSet the base shelf from clear height and add a second shelf to divide the loft and fix its height from the top partition dimensions.
- Add fixed shelves at partition level using switch to fixedAdd a fixed shelf at a partition level with a specific height by using 'Switch to Fixed Height' on the partition section rather than on the shelf panel.
- Add hanger rod and pull-out rod via partition-level customizationOpen partition-level customization for a wardrobe section and add a hanger rod and pull-out rod to its internals.
- Add hanger rods and props to cabinetsAdd hanger rods through partition-level customization and add props so they become part of the cabinet.
- Add partition configuration for double-shutter wardrobes with both-side fillerAdd a partition configuration from partition level under construction for a double-shutter wardrobe, choosing from default configurations such as left-side, right-side and both-side filler.
- Adjust panel front thickness at shelf or individual panel levelSet shelf and panel reveals in millimetres to position shelves and panels precisely from the carcass front.
- Change drawer channels and drawer sets across several unitsLearn where a wardrobe partition's Quick Access sections sit, how to edit partition drawer settings in bulk, and how to swap drawer channels on several units at once.
- Configure shelves through preferencesSet shelf settings in preferences so newly created designs already have them applied and need no manual shelf setup.
- Control sub-partition ratios explicitlySwitch a partition to auto-adjusted height and turn sub-partition ratio on or off, knowing that clearing ratios needs your consent.
- Create a slot in a full-height wardrobe via custom wardrobesSet the column configuration so the wardrobe geometry changes to create the slot you need.
- Delete a parent partition to remove all its child shelves at onceDelete a parent partition and the system removes its top and bottom partitions and their child partitions together.
- Edit cabinet partitions from the bottom so the top partition auto-adjustsEdit the lower cabinet partitions and let the remaining height be calculated automatically for the top partition.
- Find wardrobe modules in partition internals on the admin portalLocate the wardrobe modules that are available under partition internals in the admin portal.
- How wardrobe internals sit under the parent partitionLearn how the parent partition sits at the top of a wardrobe and holds every sub-partition, shelf, drawer system and other internal beneath it in the hierarchy.
- Load a saved partition configuration onto a partitionOpen the 'Partition Configuration' dropdown on a partition and apply a saved configuration, checking it fits the section.
- Make inside shelf fixed and set shutter materialSet the inside shelf of a cabinet as a fixed panel and reduce it 20 mm from the front.
- Place a single vertical partition at the centre of a unitAdd one vertical panel to a unit and it positions at the centre automatically, then adjust the distance manually if the placement is slightly off.
- Position a partition panel using partition height, depth and shelf revealPlace a horizontal partition panel by adding a custom panel, rotating it, and setting its left-right dimension and X and Y positions.
- Read a previously set loft height from the top partition's parent partitionRecover a forgotten loft height by opening the top partition of the reference wardrobe and checking its parent partition.
- Read the blue highlight to know your working level in a cabinetLearn what the blue highlight in the 3D view tells you about the partition level you are currently working on.
- Set a standard wardrobe height of 2100 mmUse 2100 mm as the standard height when you design a wardrobe.
- Set sub-partition ratio on the immediate parent to equalise childrenGive child partitions equal heights by setting the sub-partition ratio on their immediate parent partition.
- ସେଲଫ୍ ଆନୋଟେସନ୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକ ସ୍କେଲିଟନ୍ ଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ ଡିଫଲ୍ଟ ଭାବରେ ଦେଖାଯାଏସେଲଫ୍ ଆନୋଟେସନ୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକ ସ୍କେଲିଟନ୍ ଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ ସମାୟୋଜ୍ୟ, ସ୍ଥିର ଏବଂ କାଚ ସେଲଫ୍ଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଡିଫଲ୍ଟ ଭାବରେ ଚିହ୍ନିତ କରେ, ଏବଂ ଆପଣ LHS ପ୍ରପର୍ଟି ପ୍ୟାନେଲରୁ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ବନ୍ଦ କରିପାରିବେ।
- Shelves and partitions do not accept negative sizing valuesShelves and partitions in the design module cannot be given negative sizing values.
- Split a cabinet back panel using construction default partition settingsSelect a cabinet and use its construction default partition options to split the back panel or add a vertical divider.
- Understand fixed and adjustable shelf dimensionsSee how a fixed shelf runs end to end while an adjustable shelf is reduced on both sides.
- Understand how parent partition numbers are assignedLearn why parent partition numbering in a wardrobe shifts depending on which partition or shelf you click.
- Understand partition selection levels in a cabinetSee how clicking a partition highlights the clicked part and its parent level so you can tell which level of the cabinet you selected.
- Understand what a wardrobe partition isLearn how the empty internal space of a wardrobe carcass is divided into parts and what the blue area represents.
- Use an invisible shelf to adjust partition height for drawersAdd a shelf, hide it, and use it to set partition height for drawer systems without a physical shelf.
କାଉଣ୍ଟରଟପ, ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ199
- Control edgeband selection, linking and visibilityLearn how edgeband is auto-selected by rules, linked to finishes, removed by profiles and shown on the 3D model.
- ଫିନିସ୍ ଲଗାଇବା ପୂର୍ବରୁ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ଏଜ୍ ବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁକାଟାଲଗରେ ଏଜ୍ ବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ଏଣ୍ଟ୍ରି ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁ, ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ କିମ୍ବା ଶଟରର ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ପାଖ ପାଇଁ ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକ ନିର୍ଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ସ୍ତରର ସେଟିଂସରୁ ଗୋଟିଏ ଏଜ୍ର ଫିନିସ୍ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ।
- ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ସ୍ତରରେ ଦୃଶ୍ୟମାନ ଏବଂ ଅଦୃଶ୍ୟ ଏଜବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ପାର୍ଶ୍ୱ ଉଦ୍ଦିଷ୍ଟ ଭାବରେ ସମାପ୍ତ ହେବା ପାଇଁ ଏକ ପ୍ୟାନେଲର ସାମ୍ନା ଧାର ଏବଂ ଅବଶିଷ୍ଟ ପାର୍ଶ୍ୱଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସେମାନଙ୍କର ନିଜସ୍ୱ ଏଜବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ।
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ର ଚଉଡ଼ା, ଗଭୀରତା ଓ ଉଚ୍ଚତାରେ କଣ ଅନ୍ତର୍ଭୁକ୍ତ ନୁହେଁ ତାହା ବୁଝନ୍ତୁଶଟର, କାଉଣ୍ଟରଟପ୍ ଓ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଭଳି କେଉଁ ଅଂଶଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଦିଆଯାଇଥିବା ମାପରୁ ଅଲଗା ଭାବରେ ଯୋଡ଼ାଯାଏ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Materials > Edgeband ଅଧୀନରେ ଭୂମିକା ଅନୁସାରେ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ଏଜ୍ ବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ବାଛନ୍ତୁMaterials > Edgeband ଅଧୀନରେ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଏଜ୍ ବ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡକୁ ଏହାର ଭୂମିକା ଅନୁସାରେ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ Edgeband Linking ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ ଯାହାଫଳରେ କାର୍କାସ୍ ଏବଂ ସଟର୍ Internal Finish କିମ୍ବା External Finish ଅନୁସରଣ କରିବ।
- ଏକ ପ୍ୟାନେଲକୁ ଲକ୍ଷ୍ୟ ଗଭୀରତା, ପଛ କିମ୍ବା ସାମନା ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ବିସ୍ତାର କରନ୍ତୁସଠିକ୍ ବିସ୍ତାର ପରିମାଣ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଏକ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଲକ୍ଷ୍ୟ ଗଭୀରତା ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ପହଞ୍ଚେ, ପଛ ପର୍ଯ୍ୟନ୍ତ ଯାଏ କିମ୍ବା କାର୍କାସ୍ ବାହାରକୁ ଠେଲିଯାଏ।
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (199)
- ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ସ୍ତରରେ ଏକ ଶଟର ଓଭରରାଇଡ୍ କରନ୍ତୁକ୍ୟାବିନେଟର ଅନ୍ୟ ଅଂଶକୁ ପ୍ରଭାବିତ ନକରି ଏକ ଶଟରକୁ ନିଜର ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଓ ଫିନିଶ୍ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ।
- Set and check the back panel offset on a carcassSet the back panel offset at carcass level and work out the clear void it leaves behind the panel.
- ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ସ୍ତରରେ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରି ଏକ ପଛ ପ୍ୟାନେଲର ମୋଟେଇ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁପ୍ୟାନେଲ ସ୍ତରରେ ସେହି ଗୋଟିଏ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରି ଏକ ପଛ ପ୍ୟାନେଲକୁ ଅଧିକ କାର୍କାସ ମୋଟେଇ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ, ଯେପରି ଏକ ଆଇଲ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ରୋଷେଇଘର ପାଇଁ 18 mm।
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ର ବାହ୍ୟ ଅଂଶ ବାହାରେ ଶଟର ଗୁଣ ନେଉଥିବା ଏକ ଏଣ୍ଡ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁକ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ରେ ଏକ ଏଣ୍ଡ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଏକ ଦୃଶ୍ୟମାନ ସମାପ୍ତ ସାଇଡ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଶଟରର ଗୁଣ ସହିତ କାର୍କାସ୍ ବାହାରେ ରହିବ।
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ସେଟିଂସରେ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ବିନ୍ୟାସ କରନ୍ତୁକ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ବିନ୍ୟାସରେ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ବିକଳ୍ପଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଖୋଜନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ୍ସଟେନସନ ପାରାମିଟର ସହିତ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଧାରକୁ ବଢ଼ାନ୍ତୁ କିମ୍ବା କମାନ୍ତୁପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଧାରକୁ ଲମ୍ବା କିମ୍ବା ଛୋଟ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଚାରି ଦିଗୀୟ ଏକ୍ସଟେନସନ ଫିଲ୍ଡ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ, ଋଣାତ୍ମକ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ସହିତ।
- ଅତିରିକ୍ତ କାଟାଲଗ ୟୁନିଟ ବିନା ଗ୍ଲାସ ଶଟର ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ଗ୍ଲାସ ପ୍ରକାର ପାଇଁ ଅଲଗା କାଟାଲଗ ୟୁନିଟ ନ ତିଆରି କରି ଶଟରକୁ ଗ୍ଲାସକୁ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସେଲଫକୁ ଗ୍ଲାସ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Apply one edge band to every panel in a cabinetAdd an edge band at the cabinet level so it is applied to every panel in that cabinet.
- Create a curved cabinet with a custom panel and panel design editsBuild a curved cabinet by adding a custom panel at cabinet level, sizing it from carcass parameters, and adjusting its offsets so it sits correctly.
- Make a panel follow the shutter finishPoint a panel's external finish source at Shutter External so it updates with the shutter colour.
- ୟୁନିଟ୍ରେ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ପ୍ରକାର ଓ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁପ୍ରତି ୟୁନିଟ୍ ପାଇଁ କାଠ କିମ୍ବା ଅଣ-କାଠ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ construction ବିକଳ୍ପରୁ ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Handle skirting buffer, curved panels and shutter depthAbsorb the site buffer at the skirting, model a curved corner as one panel and cover the front including shutter thickness.
- How back panel groove offset and extension are configuredLearn how a grooved back panel's offset from the panel edge and its extension depth are defined and where to set them.
- How hinge quantities are generated for carcass and shutter panelsLearn why hinges are counted from the interaction between a carcass panel and a shutter panel, and what happens when the carcass panel is turned off.
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ସ୍ପଟଲାଇଟ୍ କିମ୍ବା ଷ୍ଟ୍ରିପ୍ ଲାଇଟ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାର ଆଲୋକ ଉତ୍ସ ସେଟ୍ କରନ୍ତୁକ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ଏକ ଷ୍ଟ୍ରିପ୍ ଲାଇଟ୍ କିମ୍ବା ସ୍ପଟଲାଇଟ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ସ୍ପଟଲାଇଟ୍କୁ ଏକ ଆଲୋକ ଉତ୍ସ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାକୁ ସ୍ଥାପନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ଆଉ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ନ ଥିଲେ ଯେକୌଣସି ଆଲୋକ ଅପସାରଣ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Add grooving to custom and other panelsLearn where grooving is added automatically and how to specify it for custom panels and change back panel grooving across all units at once.
- Apply edge bands from the design portalApply edge bands to your cabinets from the design portal.
- Create a construction style to apply the same edge band across panelsCreate a construction style so the same edge band applies across different panels, then fine-tune it per element.
- Create curved panel edges with fillet and panel thickness cutGive a panel a curved edge with the fillet tool, set cuts to panel thickness cut, and mirror the treatment to the opposite side.
- Add custom support panels and set back panel offset and groovingAdd a support panel with its own core material, finish and label, and configure the back panel offset and grooving depth in the extension parameters.
- Add hardware to custom panels with rules and connectorsCover custom panels with hardware rules, or add connectors manually where rules do not reach.
- Add strip lights at panel levelAdd a strip light to the bottom panel and set its reference, then repeat for other panels such as the left one.
- Add strip light to a wall unit panel and set its colourLight a wall unit by adding a strip light to its panel, choosing front or back, and setting the colour in the design's Lights preferences.
- Clone and modify filler panels for both sides of a cabinetClone a filler panel and modify it so each side of a cabinet gets its own filler.
- Create a cutout in a shutter via panel-level edit panel designCut a shape out of a shutter by drawing it in panel-level edit panel design and setting it to cut through the panel thickness.
- Cut shapes into a panel using Cut instead of ExtrudeDraw a shape on a panel face and use Cut instead of Extrude to make a cut-out or groove at the depth you need.
- Extend a panel down to the floor instead of skirtingMake a panel continue to the floor instead of showing skirting by using the extension parameters in its construction settings.
- Extend a panel using the construction tabGrow a panel on its left, right, front or back side by entering an extension value in the construction tab.
- Model curved cabinetry with curved custom panelsLearn how curved custom panels let you model curved cabinetry cases, and why standard carcass panels cannot be curved.
- Replace a countertop finish using the Replace buttonChange the finish of a countertop by selecting its units and picking a new option from the Replace list.
- Set the default back panel groove to 5 mmSet the default back panel grooving to 5 mm so back panels are grooved at that depth by default.
- Apply a shaped edge or beading profile via Edit Panel DesignOpen the panel's Edit Panel Design option and change its profile to apply a shaped edge or beading profile.
- Change skirting finish independently of shutterGive the skirting of a skirting wardrobe its own finish instead of the shutter's default.
- Change skirting height by changing the hardwareChange a unit's skirting height by swapping the fixed-height PVC skirting hardware, commonly 100 mm or 150 mm.
- Create a cut in a panel using edit panel design and offset rectangleCut a panel by drawing the cut shape and moving its edge with the offset rectangle while keeping the panel outline intact.
- Drive panel extensions and offsets with parametersBind extension, offset and cutout values to design parameters so panels update automatically when the model changes.
- Match partition shelf reveal to SKUs and drawersRead how partition configuration SKUs and drawer placement depend on the partition shelf reveal value.
- Rotate grain orientation on individual panels in designControl the grain direction on specific panels by setting the grain orientation on the panel in the design module and rotating the grain on each panel as needed.
- Round a panel corner via panel-level construction edit shapeGive a panel or shelf a rounded corner by selecting it, choosing edit shape in panel-level construction, picking the sides to curve and entering a radius.
- Understand sink unit rails and skirting optionsLearn how sink units are built with top and back rails and how to turn skirting on or off from the cabinet skirting options.
- Add side fillers and extend panels to alignAlign a panel by checking its front side at panel level construction and setting the front depth extension to the shutter panel thickness.
- Add strip light and spotlight to wall cabinet bottom panelLight a wall cabinet by adding a strip light and a spotlight to its bottom panel.
- Add strip lights to a panel and set reference and positionAdd a strip light to a panel, set its Reference and Position offset, and repeat for each panel or add more lights to the same panel.
- Apply one countertop to several units with Modify CountertopSelect several cabinets and set their countertop thickness and material together in one pop-up.
- Change countertop material and thickness from the Countertop menuPick the countertop material and set its thickness, either following the material SKU or entering a value yourself.
- Changing countertop thickness does not auto-change the top panelLearn why the top panel of a kitchen base unit stays a rail panel when you change the countertop thickness.
- Create a custom panel with cutouts using construction edit panel designAdd a vertical panel with its height, width and core material thickness set, draw the cutout geometry in construction edit panel design, and assign the cut to the panel.
- Extend the back panel at Construction levelNavigate to the Construction level to extend the back panel.
- Find a through cut on the face it was made onFlip to the face where a cut was created to see or edit it, since each panel face is handled independently and through cuts otherwise show only in the 3D view.
- Fix skirting height so panels adjust automaticallyChange the skirting height value so the overall height re-applies and the panel adjusts without manual edits.
- Inset back skirting between side panels or side skirtingAdd a back skirting so it sits inset between the side panels or side skirting, letting the side panels close the skirting ends.
- Modify countertop and handles from the properties panelSelect units to change their countertop material and thickness or swap their handles from the properties panel.
- ଅକ୍ଷ ଏବଂ କାଉଣ୍ଟରଟପ୍ ସ୍ତର ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ହବ୍ ଏବଂ ସିଙ୍କ୍ ଉପାଦାନଗୁଡ଼ିକ ସ୍ଥାପନ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ହବ୍କୁ ଏହାର Furniture/Light Unit ସ୍ତରରେ XYZ ଅକ୍ଷ ସହିତ ସ୍ଥାପନ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ କାଉଣ୍ଟରଟପ୍ ସ୍ତରରେ Sink ବିକଳ୍ପ ସହିତ ଏକ ସିଙ୍କ୍ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- Remove or switch off panels on a single cabinetChange a unit's construction carcass settings so unneeded panels are removed only for that placement.
- Resize cabinet end panel at design panel level, not admin portalChange a cabinet end panel's depth in the design phase at the panel level so the change applies only to the cabinet you are working on.
- See a panel's type in the design portalSelect a panel and open its info option to see the panel name and panel type.
- Set end panel depth to carcass level for open unitsStop the end panel at carcass level on a top unit that has no shutter so it aligns with the carcass.
- Set strip light position per panel to avoid collisionDefine the strip light position on each panel as a distance from the front or back edge so lights avoid collisions.
- Add a horizontal custom panel at cabinet level and rotate itAdd a top panel to a cabinet using cabinet-level custom panel, then add a horizontal custom panel and place it anywhere.
- Add custom panels to a drawer system and map them as carcass materialAdd custom panels at the drawer system level and set their material at any panel level to map them as carcass material.
- Add profiles to a shelf via panel section constructionPut a profile on a shelf by adding it from the panel section's construction/top settings on the required side.
- Add strip lights to a panel and set their side, orientation and positionAdd a strip light from the selected panel's panel options, then move it to the other face, choose Horizontal or Vertical, and shift it along the panel.
- Apply multiple laminates on one panel using Edit Panel DesignGive a single panel more than one laminate or material by adding shapes over the areas that need a different finish.
- Change construction options that affect production and pricingAdjust how carcass panels extend, connect and rail so the construction tab changes carry through to production outputs and pricing.
- Change countertop material via selection tree or unitChange a countertop's material by selecting the unit or using the selection tree, then choosing a subcategory and a specific material or colour.
- Control wardrobe side panel visibilityControl whether the side panels of a wardrobe are shown.
- Create custom panel designs with extrude, offset move, fillet and cutDraw and shape a custom panel design, round its corners and cut a through opening.
- Create trim and groove designs on a shutter with Extrude and CutPull a drawn region forward with Extrude or recess it by a cut depth to build trim and groove-style designs on a shutter.
- Customise a panel via Edit Shape or Edit Panel DesignChange the outer shape of a panel, for example from a rectangle to a circle or ellipse, or add edge curves.
- Edge banding and materials for cut shapes in Edit Panel DesignLearn how cut shapes in Edit Panel Design can carry edge banding and take a material for the intended finish.
- Edit panel design to add cutouts and rotate panelsCreate cutouts such as back-panel grooving and rotate panels when needed by editing the panel design.
- Extend a panel side using the R handleExtend a panel by a specified amount, such as 100 mm, using the R handle.
- Extend the bottom panel to cover a gap where the skirting breaksSelect the panel and extend it to cover the gap where a separate skirting would otherwise break.
- Fix a panel dimension so it stops resizing with the unitSet a panel length, depth or height to a fixed value so resizing the cabinet or wardrobe leaves that panel size unchanged.
- How custom panels are listed under cabinetsLearn which cabinet a custom panel is listed under depending on where you add it.
- Link back panel core material to carcass core materialLink each back core material to its matching carcass core material in cabinet preferences so the back panel core applies by default across all cabinets.
- Make a backlit panel using a box-type filler behind a plain panelBuild a backlit panel by adding a box-type filler behind a plain front panel and placing strip lights inside it.
- Offset a cabinet bottom panel inward using carcass panel thicknessRaise a bottom panel by one panel thickness so it sits inside the carcass instead of below the side panels.
- Reduce skirting size using negative back extension on skirting panelShrink a skirting run and fit side panels around the skirting by applying negative extensions in the panel editor.
- Set an exposed side panel on a unitOpen the unit at panel level and change the panel to an exposed panel, since it cannot be set as a unit-level default.
- Set recessed skirting using depth offset in skirting optionsRecess the skirting from the front shutter by entering a depth offset value in the skirting options.
- Understand front and side panels in wardrobe skirting constructionLearn how the front panel and the side panel are built in wardrobe skirting construction.
- ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ବିସ୍ତାର ଦିଗ L, R, B ଏବଂ F ବୁଝନ୍ତୁଚାରିଟି ବିସ୍ତାର ଦିଗ L, R, B ଏବଂ F କିପରି କାମ କରେ ଏବଂ ଏକ ପାର୍ଶ୍ୱରେ ଋଣାତ୍ମକ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ସେହି ପାର୍ଶ୍ୱରୁ ପ୍ୟାନେଲକୁ କିପରି କମାଏ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Understand the automatic 7 mm back panel grooveThe back panel groove is always 7 mm and comes correctly in the design without any manual change.
- Why skirting and pelmet options depend on base or wall unitsLearn how a cabinet's mounting plane sets it as a base or wall unit and which skirting, pelmet, cornice and rail options that unlocks.
- Add a backsplash from countertop level settingsAdd a backsplash as a countertop-level modification, set its height and shift it up, and keep it from running behind the tiles.
- Add a custom ply panel using custom panel furniture optionPlace a custom ply panel on the floor, size it, and check it in 3D view.
- Add a groove to a panel and set its CAM operation typeEdit a panel's shape to add a groove with a specified depth, then include it in the CAM section to set its operation type, such as routing.
- Add a hob to a countertopSelect the countertop and pick a hob from the library to place it at countertop level.
- Add a parametric custom panel inside a unit via constructionAdd a horizontal top panel inside a unit and drive its size and position with parametric formulas.
- Add a vertical gola profile between two cabinetsSelect both cabinets and open the properties menu on the left side to add a vertical gola profile between them.
- Add countertop drops and extensions per sideExtend the countertop on chosen sides and switch on drops with a height so the extension aligns with the design.
- Add custom horizontal or vertical panels from the furnish optionFill gaps such as the space between loft and wall units with custom add-on panels sized and placed using the axis controls.
- Add grooves, cuts and extrusions to panelsUse the Edit Panel Design tool to draw a shape on a door or panel and cut or extrude it into aesthetic patterns or custom cutouts.
- Add handles and profiles to panel hardwareAdd handles under the handle section and select the required profile from the list.
- Add or remove an end panel from cabinet constructionAdd or remove a left or right end panel on a selected unit from its cabinet construction settings.
- Apply bulk changes to multiple selected unitsSelect only the units that should share a change, then edit their common properties once so the change applies to every selected unit.
- Apply handle profiles and add fillersApply handle profiles and add fillers to customize your panels.
- ଏକ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଷ୍ଟ୍ରିପ ଲାଇଟର ଦିଗ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁଯେଉଁ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ଷ୍ଟ୍ରିପ ଲାଇଟ ଯୋଡ଼ା ଯାଇଥିଲା ସେହି ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଖୋଲନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସେହି ପ୍ୟାନେଲର strip-light ସେଟିଂସରେ ଏହାର ଦିଗକୁ horizontal ଏବଂ vertical ମଧ୍ୟରେ ବଦଳାନ୍ତୁ।
- Change edge binding for skirting at panel levelGive a skirting area its own edge binding, different from the shutter, by changing it at panel level.
- Check strip light placement on a panel against its depth and heightConfirm that the configured depth and height values are correct as entered so a strip light sits on top of a panel regardless of depth.
- Create a center cutout in a panelDraw the cutout shape, position it with click-and-move, then set the panel to cut through at panel thickness.
- Create drawer cutouts via panel design with parametric formulasDraw a rectangle on a carcass panel in panel design and drive its edges with parameters so drawer openings update automatically.
- Create grooves using offset copy with cut propertySet the groove depth and mark it as a cut so the software recognises the depth in the final design.
- Cut shapes into a panel with a closed boundaryDraw a closed boundary shape, mark it as a cut and set the cut depth so the software knows where to cut the panel.
- Edit a panel's shape with Change Length, Shift Edge and OffsetReshape a panel outline in Edit Shape and use Offset in Edit Panel Design to add a frame inside it.
- Edit countertop accessories at furniture levelAccessories added onto a countertop, such as a hob or sink, are handled at the Furniture/Light Unit level rather than cabinet level.
- Edit panel designs in the construction sectionEdit panel designs in the construction section to reduce panel sizes and add custom shapes or cutouts defined as cuts with specified dimensions.
- ସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ପାଇଁ ମାନୁଆଲ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନିଂ ସକ୍ଷମ କରନ୍ତୁସ୍କର୍ଟିଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲକୁ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ପ୍ରିଫରେନ୍ସରେ ମାନୁଆଲ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନିଂ ଚାଲୁ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ମାନୁଆଲ ଡାଇମେନସନିଂ ପାଇଁ ପ୍ୟାନେଲଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ Annotate Align ବ୍ୟବହାର କରିବାକୁ ସକ୍ଷମ କରନ୍ତୁସେହି ପସନ୍ଦ ଚାଲୁ କରନ୍ତୁ ଯାହା ପ୍ୟାନେଲଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ Annotate Align ବ୍ୟବହାର କରିବାକୁ ଦେଇଥାଏ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଆପଣ ଡିଜାଇନ ଉପରେ ହାତରେ ଡାଇମେନସନ ରଖିପାରିବେ।
- Find the countertop brightness and glossiness settingsSelect the countertop to open its level and see which controls it offers.
- Hide or delete carcass panels via panel-level visibilitySwitch off a single carcass panel from the cabinet's Construction > Carcass > Carcass Panels Visibility.
- How extrusion and cut differ on a panelLearn how extrusion projects outward from a panel surface while a cut carves into it, either as a through cutout or to a set depth.
- How wardrobe side panels reach the floorLearn how wardrobe side panels run full length to the floor and why a cutout is made for the front skirting.
- How wardrobe width affects the top panelLearn when a wardrobe uses a single top panel and when its width splits the top panel into two SKUs.
- Identify a selected panel by its Panel IDWhen you select a panel, the left panel shows several identifiers, and the Panel ID is the last one shown.
- Match countertop shift-up value to its heightKeep a countertop or backsplash at the right elevation by setting its shift-up to match its height.
- Offset an extruded face with front shiftShift the front face of an extruded shape by a distance to offset a panel relative to another layer.
- Offset a panel boundary by a set distanceOffset a panel boundary from the outer edges to get a uniform margin on all sides without measuring manually.
- Place a sink on a counter, not a slanted panelPlace sinks only on counters such as granite, and use a manually inserted plumbing fixture when you need one on a slanted or angled panel.
- Place plants on countertops manuallyPlace appliances like hobs on the countertop, but replace or position a plant manually.
- Read entered vs cutlist panel dimensionsSee why a panel's editable dimension can differ from the value that goes to the cutlist and board layout.
- Set a custom cabinet panel to a curved shapeGive a custom horizontal panel a curved shape and set its flat lengths, radius and arc angle so its width follows the expanded length.
- Set a wardrobe's skirting optionsSet the skirting for a wardrobe unit with its Skirting Options, choosing which planks show and how tall the skirting is.
- Set groove depth tolerance from the admin portalAdjust the depth of a groove without changing the panel width by adding a groove depth tolerance in the admin portal.
- Trim a side panel to match an angled top using Edit panel designAdjust a side panel so it matches the angle of a custom angled top panel using Edit panel design or Edit shape.
- Understand how panel extension is measuredLearn that panel extension is calculated from carcass depth plus shutter thickness, with the default system keeping a 2 mm gap between the carcass and the shutter.
- Understand the controls on a selected door's left panelLearn what each control on a selected door's left panel does, from size and shift to flipping sides and hinges.
- Understand why edgeband colour is hidden by defaultLearn why edgeband colour is never visible in an Infurnia design by default, keeping designs with many panels light.
- Use drops as a floor drop or backsplash and raise the countertopSet a drop's height and shift so it reaches the floor, covers the tiling, or lifts the countertop to the required level.
- Add a custom end panel to a cabinetAdd a custom end panel to a cabinet and it extends on whichever side you add it.
- Add a custom horizontal panel sized from carcass width and thicknessAdd a horizontal custom panel inside a cabinet and size it from the carcass width, depth and panel thickness so it aligns correctly.
- ଏକ ଢାଳୁଆ ଉପର ପାଇଁ ଏକ କଷ୍ଟମ ଇନକ୍ଲାଇନ୍ଡ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଏକ ଢାଳୁଆ ଉପର ପାଇଁ ଏକ କଷ୍ଟମ ଇନକ୍ଲାଇନ୍ଡ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଯୋଡ଼ିବା ପାଇଁ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ଇନକ୍ଲାଇନ୍ ଗଣନା କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସେହି ଅନୁସାରେ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଆକାର ବଢ଼ାନ୍ତୁ।
- ଅଣ-ମାନକ ଆକାର ପାଇଁ ଏକ କଷ୍ଟମ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଯେତେବେଳେ ଏକ ସେଲଫ କିମ୍ବା ପାର୍ଟିସନକୁ ଏପରି ଆକାର କିମ୍ବା ସ୍ଥାନ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହୁଏ ଯାହା ମାନକ ସାଇଜିଂ ପାରାମିଟରଦ୍ୱାରା ତିଆରି କରାଯାଇପାରିବ ନାହିଁ, ସେତେବେଳେ ଏକ କଷ୍ଟମ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- Add a custom vertical panel via Furnish > Panels and apply a laminate finishCreate a custom vertical panel by choosing its material and finish, then setting its dimensions.
- Add and size a custom panel on a cabinetAdd a custom panel from a cabinet's Construction tab, then set its shape, dimensions and position, using expressions of unit parameters when the panel sits inside a unit.
- Add bottom support panels under a wardrobeSet the count and height of bottom support panels from the cabinet's Carcass options and check them in the cutlist.
- Add countertop ply under graniteAdd a ply support panel under the countertop with its own thickness and materials, and remove it again when not needed.
- Add custom panels for non-standard rails and supportsAdd, copy and shape custom panels inside a cabinet to place rails and supports where the standard structure provides none.
- Add horizontal or vertical panels and shelves with custom panelUse the custom panel option to place a horizontal or vertical panel and turn it into a shelf inside the cabinet.
- Add skirting and extra end panels from cabinet constructionConfigure skirting on a unit and add an extra left or right end panel from the cabinet's Construction tab.
- Add stability rails to a cabinet and let the system space themSelect a cabinet, add the number of stability rails your standards call for, and let the system space them evenly across the back.
- Assign panel types to split skirting segmentsGive split skirting segments the panel types that let hardware and connector rules tell them apart from unsplit skirting.
- Calculate the finished elevation of a cabinetAdd cabinet height, skirting height and countertop thickness to get the total elevation for aligning elements.
- Change a filler panel's type and dimensions from its propertiesCorrect a filler panel by editing its dimension in its properties or by replacing it with a filler of the right type.
- Change construction and shutter options at unit levelApply construction and shutter changes to a single unit and see the difference on its panels.
- Change internal and external color of a storage boxSet a storage box's carcass color and external finish independently using the relevant color controls.
- Check oversized panels by downloading the oversized-panel PDFFind panels that exceed the board size and correct each one in the design.
- Check that panel sizes match the built carcass structureMake sure panel sizes are computed from the carcass configuration actually built and adjust them when it differs.
- Choose between single and top chimney panelsPick the chimney panel variant that gives you just the front or both the front and the top.
- Close a skirting gap with extension parametersClose a gap at the skirting by applying extension parameters to the skirting component.
- Configure front and back skirting on a wardrobeChoose whether a wardrobe has front and back skirting.
- Confirm the half-top panel is false for a full topCheck the half-top panel setting so a full top is built correctly.
- Convert an end panel to an upright from its Construction tabConvert an end panel's own panel on the Construction tab to an upright so it stays in place and gains shelf connector sets and drill holes like an upright.
- Create a headboard design as a custom panel inside a cabinetTurn a cabinet into a headboard by keeping one back panel and adding a tilted custom panel you shape, finish and save.
- Extrude or cut grooves on a panel via Edit Panel DesignCreate grooves or raised shapes on a panel by adding a shape in Edit Panel Design and applying it.
- Fillet or chamfer countertop cornersGive each of the four countertop corners its own rounded or chamfered edge with an entered value.
- Filter panels by type to bulk-select shelves and partitionsFilter the panels list by unit SK name and panel type so you can select many shelves or partitions at once and change their finish in one action.
- Fix laminate that does not resize with panel heightLearn why a manually pasted laminate or colour rectangle stays at a fixed position and size when the panel height changes.
- Fix skirting panels inheriting unexpected materialsWhen a skirting panel picks up the wrong material in every new design, check whether an admin skirting preference is overriding the component's configured inheritance.
- Give stacked panels a front shift equal to the lower panel thicknessGive the upper panel a front shift equal to the thickness of the panel below it so the two surfaces do not overlap.
- Hide carcass panels you do not needToggle panel visibility to hide the carcass panels you do not need.
- How a countertop backsplash changes the slab's back extensionLearn how switching on a countertop's Back drop sets Extension Options > Back to 40 and how to bring the slab edge back to the unit's back.
- How a countertop side's Extension Options value includes its Countertop DropLearn how a side's Countertop Drop is added to its Extension Options value while the slab itself still runs only the set amount past the unit.
- How back and front panel extensions are set in preferencesLearn how the back, front and drawer bottom extensions are configured separately in preferences.
- ସ୍ପ୍ଲିଟ୍ ଟପ୍ ଏବଂ ବଟମ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରେ ହାର୍ଡୱେର୍ ଡ୍ରିଲ୍ କିପରି ପଡ଼େଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟର ଟପ୍ ଏବଂ ବଟମ୍ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ପ୍ରତି-ବିଭାଗ ଖଣ୍ଡରେ ବିଭକ୍ତ ହେଲେ ଶଟର-ମେକାନିଜିମ୍ ହାର୍ଡୱେର୍ ଡ୍ରିଲ୍ କିପରି ସ୍ଥାପିତ ହୁଏ ତାହା ଶିଖନ୍ତୁ।
- How L-shaped custom panel thickness is derivedLearn which dimensions of an L-shaped custom panel you can set and why its thickness is fixed.
- How strip lights work on L-corner and pentagonal corner panelsAdd one strip light to an L-corner or pentagonal corner unit and it becomes two linked strips, one along each leg of the L.
- Inset a shelf from left and right using construction offsetsMake a shelf shorter than the full carcass width by entering negative left and right construction offsets.
- Know what applying, removing or replacing a configuration clearsLearn which parts of a partition survive a configuration change and which are removed with it.
- Model rounded forms with the architecture slab toolModel the shape in the architecture slab tool so it stays as modelled and is not treated as a standard cabinet.
- Move a single stability rail or set rail dimensionsOffset one rail to a specific height with Translate Panel and set rail dimensions from the cabinet's construction options.
- Order filler panels wider than the leftover site gapEnter a filler panel width larger than the actual gap in the design, because the panel is produced at the size you enter.
- Place a handle and set its heightPlace a handle of a particular size and specify the height at which it sits.
- Place a separate filler at the side of a unitPlace a separate filler at the side of the unit, where the top panel does not extend to cover it.
- Position a countertop drop and backsplash on the countertopLearn how a countertop drop hangs from the underside of the countertop slab and how to set the shift so a backsplash stands exactly on the countertop.
- Read the yellow and blue bounding boxes when selecting a unitLearn what the yellow and blue bounding boxes mean when you select a unit and what the box measures.
- Remove a shelf from a designSelect the shelf, open its panel-level menu and use the "Delete Shelf" entry, which is greyed out when the shelf is protected by the disallow-deletion setting.
- Remove back panel behind appliances at cabinet levelAppliance units normally have no back panel by default, so no extra step is needed for them.
- Resize or remove sinks and hobs from the selection treeSelect a sink or hob in the selection tree to resize or delete it, since built-in appliances are managed at the countertop level.
- Select a panel profile for a panelOnce profiles are configured, select from the available options for the panel you are designing.
- Set a shelf panel to the Adjustable shelf type with a glass coreSet a shelf panel to the Adjustable shelf type and give it a glass core material such as a tinted glass of a given thickness.
- Set carcass back rail for a rail-based back panelMake a cabinet back panel rail-based instead of a full panel by setting the carcass back rail option.
- Set skirting joint order and remove skirting from pricingChoose which panel sits on top at the skirting joints and exclude any skirting you remove from the pricing quotation and BOQ.
- Set the bottom panel offset to raise the bottom panelSet the bottom panel offset to control the clear gap below the bottom panel and raise it by the side panel height when needed.
- Set up blind corner units and the dummy panelBuild a blind corner unit with a dummy panel between the shutter and non-shutter front panel and set its depth.
- Target the right panel in panel-type conditionsNarrow broad carcass panel conditions to the specific panel so connectors land only where intended.
- Understand built-in carcass thickness parametersLearn which carcass thickness parameters the software creates automatically and which ones you add yourself.
- Understand how a furniture light's panel lists its light sourcesLearn how a furniture light's panel lists each light source by position and what its properties and multi-selection behaviour are.
- Understand sink unit back panels and railsLearn that sink units default to rails at the back instead of a full back panel.
- Use formulas so extensions follow skirting height automaticallyDrive an extension's value with a formula referencing the skirting height so it updates on its own when that height changes.
- Use reduction options to adjust panel left, right, top and bottomSet reductions on the left, right, top and bottom of a panel in the construction panel settings, where the number you enter reduces that panel dimension.
- Use the cutting tool on ceilings, panelling and wardrobe panelsApply the cutting tool to ceilings, panelling and wardrobe panels, not just one surface type.
ହାର୍ଡୱେର, କନେକ୍ଟର ଏବଂ ନିୟମ72
- Add accessory drilling to a panel via panel hardwarePlace an accessory such as a lock on a panel as panel hardware, position it relative to the panel size, and check the drill positions in 2D CAM mode.
- Attach site hardware per cabinet via hardware rulesCreate hardware rules that attach the right hardware to each cabinet and wardrobe, then clean up and activate the rule to set up hinges.
- ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ ପାଇଁ ହିଞ୍ଜ ବ୍ରାଣ୍ଡ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁଡିଜାଇନ ଭିତରେ ହିଞ୍ଜ ବ୍ରାଣ୍ଡ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ହିଞ୍ଜ ନିୟମ ଏବଂ କନେକ୍ଟର କାର୍ଡ ସଠିକ ହିଞ୍ଜ ଭାରିଆଣ୍ଟ ନିର୍ଣ୍ଣୟ କରିପାରିବ।
- Add a multi-purpose lock from panel hardwareAdd a multi-purpose lock to a cabinet panel and adjust its position afterwards.
- Add corner unit accessories through the shutter systemFix a magic corner or similar accessory to the shutter and get it into the hardware list.
- Edit a connector card to change the whole design and future cabinetsEdit the original connector so the whole design and future cabinets are modified.
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (72)
- Add connectors by admin-portal rules or manuallyAdd connectors either by defining a rule in the admin portal so matching imported cabinets get the rule's connectors automatically, or by adding them manually.
- Add locks, grills and other fittings with Panel HardwareAdd fittings such as locks, ventilation grills, stiffeners and hooks to a selected panel through Panel Hardware instead of separate commands.
- Auto-solve hinge and shelf collisions from the violations listUse the auto-solve option when the violations check reports a collision such as a hinge placed at the same position as a fixed shelf.
- Replace a hinge connector card to use a different hinge typeSelect a different hinge type even when no connector card exists for it.
- ଭାଇଓଲେସନ ପ୍ୟାନେଲରୁ କିମ୍ବା ମାନୁଆଲି ଭାବରେ ଡ୍ରିଲ କଲିଜନ ସମାଧାନ କରନ୍ତୁଭାଇଓଲେସନ ତାଲିକାରୁ ସମାଧାନ କରି ରିପୋର୍ଟ ହୋଇଥିବା ଡ୍ରିଲ କଲିଜନ ସଫା କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଯଦି ଏହା ତଥାପି ରହିଥାଏ ତେବେ ନିଜେ ଅଫସେଟ ସମାୟୋଜିତ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନରେ ହାର୍ଡୱେୟାରକୁ ଏକ କନେକ୍ଟର ଭାବରେ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁଏକ ସ୍ୱତନ୍ତ୍ର କାଟାଲଗ ଆଇଟମ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତେ ଏକ କନେକ୍ଟର ଭାବରେ ଡିଜାଇନରେ ହାର୍ଡୱେୟାର ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ଏହାର ଉତ୍ସ ଅସ୍ପଷ୍ଟ ଥିଲେ QC mode's hardware tab ରେ ଏହାକୁ ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Change hardware across multiple cabinets with the modify functionChange hardware such as drawer types on several cabinets at once instead of editing each cabinet individually.
- ଉତ୍ପାଦନ ପୂର୍ବରୁ ହାର୍ଡୱେର ଧକ୍କା ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ସମାଧାନ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ପ୍ରୋଜେକ୍ଟକୁ ଉତ୍ପାଦନକୁ ପଠାଇବା ପୂର୍ବରୁ କଲିଜନ ଫିଲ୍ଟର ସହିତ ହାର୍ଡୱେର ଧକ୍କା ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଆପଣ ପାଇଥିବା ଯେକୌଣସି ଧକ୍କାର ସମାଧାନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Check hardware and materials in QC ModeUse QC Mode to verify each unit's hardware and materials against the design-wide raw materials list before production.
- Choose cabinet-level or global connector scenario changesDecide whether a connector scenario change should affect only the selected cabinets or the whole project by choosing where you open the connector settings.
- How automation rules work: applicability, conditions and actionsLearn how one rule engine with applicability, conditions and actions powers design constraints, hardware rules, manufacturing rules and design automation.
- How hinge count and position change with cabinet heightLearn how hardware rules set hinge count and placement by cabinet height range and update them automatically when height changes.
- Link the correct SKU and set quantity and type for connectorsWhen editing connector properties, link the correct SKU within the hardware category and set the quantity and type, such as nylon sockets or double twisters.
- Set and edit hinge positions within defined rangesConfigure hinge positions in the admin portal, then adjust them within the defined ranges in the connector card editor.
- Understand how scenarios list carcass and meeting panelsLearn how a scenario names the carcass panel first and the panel it meets second, with the meeting side given as a face.
- Use a panel type condition to differentiate shutter variants in hardware rulesGive a special shutter variant its own panel type so a hardware rule can tell it apart without the shutter design tag.
- Use X-ray mode to inspect internal hardware componentsSwitch on X-ray mode to make internal hardware such as minifix components visible so you can check and verify them during construction review.
- Apply and change handles on unitsApply gola or profile handles through Modify Handle and change handles on several units at once.
- Bulk-edit hinge positions across multiple shutters via scenario viewUse the scenario view flow to bulk-edit hinge positions across multiple shutters, and apply the same flow to replace one hinge type with another.
- Check which hardware rules apply to a cabinet via admin portalFind the hardware rules that apply to a cabinet and look up their conditions and the hardware they add.
- Clear panel collisions with Solve CollisionsUse the Solve Collisions option to automatically clear many panel collisions.
- Clone a connector card for existing cabinets onlyClone a connector card to create a modified version that applies only to existing cabinets.
- Create a hinge custom scenario between an internal panel and shutterSet the connector source to manual, then create the scenario connector and add the relevant connector card, such as a blind corner connector.
- Edit connector card spacing per cabinet in single unit panel cam modeChange the connector card spacing for one cabinet only, without affecting any other cabinet.
- Find hardware from hardware rules in outputs and BOQLearn where the hardware your org's hardware rules give a cabinet is listed, and what decides which rules reach a custom panel.
- How carcass connectors are identified and adjusted automaticallyLearn how the cabinet software identifies carcass connectors for you and adjusts their position and quantity as panel variables change.
- How default hinge configuration assigns hingesLearn how the system automatically assigns hinges when the designer does not explicitly specify them.
- How hinge scenario length is calculatedLearn that a hinge scenario's length is the common intersected length between the two panels it connects.
- ଷ୍ଟ୍ରିପ୍-ଲାଇଟ୍ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ନିର୍ଧାରଣ ଏବଂ ସ୍ୱଚାଳିତ ହାର୍ଡୱେର୍ ନିୟମ କିପରି ଚାଲୁ ଲମ୍ବ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରେଷ୍ଟ୍ରିପ୍ ଲାଇଟ୍ କିପରି ଚାଲୁ ଲମ୍ବ ଅନୁସାରେ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ନିର୍ଧାରଣ କରାଯାଏ ଏବଂ ସ୍ୱଚାଳିତ ହାର୍ଡୱେର୍ ନିୟମ କିପରି ସେଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ପ୍ରତି SKU ପାଇଁ ଏକତ୍ରିତ କରେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Remove all existing connectors before adding a new connector scenarioEnable the option to remove all existing connectors on the affected panels before adding the required connector, so the new scenario defines the panel's connector set cleanly.
- Remove connectors such as legs from a single cabinetRemove connectors such as legs from one cabinet in its Connectors and Scenarios settings, then correct other units with the same configuration individually or through the default rules.
- Replace unwanted connectors across a design via Connector and ScenariosLearn how changes made in the admin portal apply only to projects created after the change.
- Set a custom panel's panel type so rules applyGive a custom panel the right panel type so panel-type rules and their connectors reach it.
- Set connector placement with rangesSet where connectors go by adding one or more ranges, adding another range when two different ranges are needed, and choosing connector types such as dowel and hinge.
- କମ୍ପୋନେଣ୍ଟ ଏଡିଟର ଡ୍ରିଲ ଅପରେସନରେ ଡ୍ରିଲ ଗଭୀରତା ଏବଂ ବ୍ୟାସ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ କମ୍ପୋନେଣ୍ଟ ଉପରେ ଏକ ଡ୍ରିଲ ଛିଦ୍ରକୁ ଡ୍ରିଲ ଅପରେସନ ଭାବରେ ପରିଭାଷିତ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହାର depth ଏବଂ diameter ଫିଲ୍ଡ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Use filter and solve collisions automatically in single unit modeResolve collisions in single unit mode by running collision detection, filtering to violations and solving them from the right-bottom options.
- Add connector ranges by editing connector and setting size bandsSet a start/end gap and add or subtract an offset within each connector range so the connector is placed correctly for that size band.
- Add connector scenarios to a cabinet panel via bulk restructureAttach hardware connector scenarios to a cabinet panel by importing them from styles through Bulk Restructure.
- Add suspension rail hardware for wall cabinetsAdd suspension rail hardware at the volume level or the scenario level in your design so wall cabinets can be hung.
- କେବଳ ମନୋନୀତ ପରିଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ ଲାଗୁ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନକୁ ଆପଣ ଯେଉଁ ପରିଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ କାମ କରୁଛନ୍ତି ସେଥିରେ ସୀମିତ ରଖନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଅନ୍ୟ ପରିଦୃଶ୍ୟ ଅସ୍ପୃଷ୍ଟ ରହିବ।
- Apply connectors design-wide via preferences or per cabinetApply connectors such as dowels to the whole design from the design preferences, using the connector options that come from the admin portal.
- Attach utility hardware manually at panel level in designAttach utility hardware to a panel by selecting it and adding the item from the panel hardware list.
- Bulk-check missing connectors via cam connectors scenariosSpot junctions with missing connections by finding scenarios that show zero connectors.
- Change a non-standard fitting in the designChange a fitting that differs from the common standard, such as a shelf support instead of a VB fitting, through the Connectors and Scenarios settings so the design carries the right fitting.
- Check connectors and collisions in 3D using X-ray and single unit C modeSpot collisions in X-ray mode and handle exceptions in a single cabinet with single unit C mode.
- Check panel-to-panel connections in single unit cam modeSee every connection scenario between a cabinet's panels, which connector cards each one uses, and the actual drills.
- Create and apply custom connector logic for hardware in bulkReplace or add hardware connectors across a design from the Connectors settings in Manufacturing Settings.
- Find which hardware rule is applied to a cabinetOpen the cabinet and check Construction > Automation History to see which hardware rule added each hardware item.
- Fix rules that miss or overreach on panelsCheck panel type, dimensions and material classification when hardware appears in the wrong place or goes missing.
- ହାର୍ଡୱେୟାର ବୋରିଂ କେବଳ ସେହି ପ୍ୟାନେଲଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ ଦେଖାଯାଏ ଯେଉଁଠାରେ ହାର୍ଡୱେୟାର ଲଗାଯାଇଛିଏକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟରେ ହାର୍ଡୱେୟାର ବୋରିଂ ପଏଣ୍ଟଗୁଡ଼ିକ କେଉଁଠାରେ ଦେଖାଯାଏ ଏବଂ ଏକ ଆଶାକରାଯାଉଥିବା ବୋରିଂ ପଏଣ୍ଟ କାହିଁକି ଅନୁପସ୍ଥିତ ରହିପାରେ ତାହା ବୁଝନ୍ତୁ।
- ସ୍ୱୟଂଚାଳିତ ସଂଘର୍ଷ ପରିଚାଳନା କିପରି ହାର୍ଡୱେର ଦ୍ୱନ୍ଦ୍ୱ ସମାଧାନ କରେଅନ୍ୟ ଏକ ଉପାଦାନ ସହିତ ଦ୍ୱନ୍ଦ୍ୱ କରୁଥିବା ଏକ ହାର୍ଡୱେର ସ୍ଥିତିକୁ ସଫ୍ଟୱେର କିପରି ଏକ ଛୋଟ ଅତିରିକ୍ତ ଅଫସେଟ ଯୋଡ଼ି ସମାଧାନ କରେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- How automation rules run per unit and re-applyLearn how automation rules are evaluated per unit, reset and re-applied on every run, and which units and panels are skipped.
- ଡିଜାଇନର ଇନପୁଟଗୁଡ଼ିକ କେଉଁ ଅଟୋମେସନ ନିୟମଗୁଡ଼ିକ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟକାରୀ ହେବ ତାହା କିପରି ନିର୍ଣ୍ଣୟ କରନ୍ତିପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ଓ କର୍ଣ୍ଣର ୟୁନିଟରେ ସଂରକ୍ଷିତ ଡିଜାଇନର-ଇନପୁଟ ଉତ୍ତରଗୁଡ଼ିକ ତା ଉପରେ କେଉଁ ଅଟୋମେସନ ଓ ମାନୁଫ୍ୟାକଚରିଂ ନିୟମ ଲାଗୁ ହେବ ତାହା କିପରି ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରନ୍ତି ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- How hardware rules fire on custom panelsLearn how a hardware rule targeting a custom panel type fires depending on how the panel is placed and which component and subcomponent conditions you set.
- How panel drill details show connector, hardware SKU and ruleSelecting a panel's drill in a design shows the connector, hardware SKU, applied rule and drill dimensions, and those values can be changed in the admin portal.
- How skirting hardware rules aggregate skirting length per SKULearn how the system totals skirting length per skirting SKU across the whole floor for automatic hardware rules.
- ଫିଙ୍ଗର-ଗ୍ରୁଭ୍ ହ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡେଲର ଉଚ୍ଚତା କିପରି ସେଟ୍ ହୁଏଫିଙ୍ଗର-ଗ୍ରୁଭ୍ ହ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡେଲର ଉଚ୍ଚତା କେଉଁଠାରୁ ଆସେ ଏବଂ ଏହା ଅନୁପସ୍ଥିତ ଥିଲେ କଣ ହୁଏ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Know which dimensions each item type is checked againstLearn which measurements each hardware type compares against its limits when the carousel filters items.
- Place connectors automatically via scenariosSome connectors are placed automatically based on the panel type defined in scenarios.
- Select hardware individually or as a multi-selectApply hardware to a cabinet by selecting items one at a time or several at once.
- Set hardware connector range and quantity in manufacturing settingsAdd multiple range entries, each with its own quantity, so the connector is applied correctly across different panel sizes.
- Trace where hardware comes from in QC mode hardware tabOpen QC mode and use the hardware tab to see which hardware is applied to the design and how each item was added.
- Understand which panel is panel two in hardware drillingLearn which panel is classified as panel two when a drill falls on its edge band.
- Understand why profiles get no drillingsLearn that the system generates drillings only for wooden parts, so profiles never receive drillings.
- Why an automated component rule does not runAn automated rule in the component editor only executes when the geometry it depends on is present in the SKU.
- Why a none shutter mechanism creates no connector scenariosLearn why setting the shutter mechanism to none stops the software from auto-creating connector scenarios.
ଏଲିଭେସନ, ମାପ ଏବଂ ଆନୋଟେସନ41
- Generate multi-cabinet elevations and change finishes in bulkOpen a cabinet's 2D Drawings to generate elevations covering several cabinets, then group-select cabinets to change their materials and finishes in one action.
- Understand what elevation auto dimensioning coversSee which cabinet and surrounding elements auto dimensioning measures and which it leaves out.
- Create elevations from a 3D wall and toggle rich or skeleton viewGenerate an elevation from a wall in the 3D view, then switch between rich view and skeleton view and other display modes.
- ଏଲିଭେସନ ଦୃଶ୍ୟରେ କଣ ଅନ୍ତର୍ଭୁକ୍ତ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ ଅନୁପସ୍ଥିତ ଉପାଦାନଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ କିପରି ଠିକ କରିବେ ତାହା ବୁଝନ୍ତୁଏଲିଭେସନ ଦୃଶ୍ୟ କିପରି କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ଶଟର ଏବଂ ଦ୍ୱାରଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସ୍ୱୟଂଚାଳିତ ଭାବରେ ବନ୍ଦ କରେ, କେଉଁ ଉପାଦାନଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଅନ୍ତର୍ଭୁକ୍ତ କରେ ଏବଂ ଅନୁପସ୍ଥିତ ଥିବା ଜିନିଷଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ କିପରି ଫେରାଇ ଆଣିବେ ତାହା ଶିଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Auto dimensioning: per-view behavior and the visible render layer errorLearn how auto dimensioning behaves in elevation and floor plan views, how to add and remove it, and how to fix the visible render layer error.
- Generate internal and external elevations with dimensionsGenerate internal and external elevations that carry dimensions, with skeleton mode and duplicate elevations available while you work.
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (41)
- Show cabinet labels clearly in the floor planEach cabinet shows its number label in the floor plan, and you can add a custom leader-style label when text overlaps other elements.
- ଏଲିଭେସନ ପ୍ରିଫରେନ୍ସରେ ପ୍ୟାନେଲଗୁଡ଼ିକର ମାନୁଆଲ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନିଂ ସକ୍ଷମ ଅଛି କି ନାହିଁ ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରନ୍ତୁମାନୁଆଲ ଡାଇମେନ୍ସନିଂ ପାଇଁ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ସକ୍ଷମ କରିବାର ବିକଳ୍ପ ଡିଫଲ୍ଟ ଭାବରେ ଚାଲୁ ଅଛି କି ନାହିଁ ନିଶ୍ଚିତ କରନ୍ତୁ ଏବଂ ଏହା ବ୍ୟାକ ଓ କାର୍କାସ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଉପରେ କିପରି ପ୍ରଭାବ ପକାଏ ଦେଖନ୍ତୁ।
- କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ ଏବଂ ଆଇଲ୍ୟାଣ୍ଡ ରୋଷେଇଘର ପାଇଁ ସଠିକ୍ ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ବାଛନ୍ତୁଆପଣଙ୍କ ରୋଷେଇଘର ଲେଆଉଟ୍ ସହିତ ମେଳ ଖାଉଥିବା ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ପଦ୍ଧତି ବାଛନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଚିତ୍ରରେ ମାପ ଯୋଡ଼ନ୍ତୁ।
- Dimension units in an elevation with Align DimensionPick a unit's carcass, partitions and shutters by their edges and chain dimensions along the same direction in an elevation.
- Enable shutter and countertop dimensioning in preferencesTurn on the dimension preference for shutters and countertops so those parts become selectable and can be dimensioned.
- କାନ୍ଥ ପୃଷ୍ଠରେ କ୍ଲିକ୍ କରି ଏକ ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ତିଆରି କରନ୍ତୁଏହାର ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ସ୍ୱୟଂଚାଳିତ ଭାବରେ କଳା-ଧଳା କିମ୍ବା ରଙ୍ଗରେ ତିଆରି କରିବା ପାଇଁ କାନ୍ଥର ପୃଷ୍ଠରେ କ୍ଲିକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଆଡ୍ ବଟନ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଏକ ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁଆଡ୍ ବଟନ୍ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଏକ ଏଲିଭେସନ୍ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହା ସ୍ୱୟଂଚାଳିତ ଭାବରେ ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରେ।
- How opening an elevation view switches your active levelLearn what happens to your active level, version history and view position when you open an elevation view from the views bar.
- How unique labels (C10, P2, S/F prefixes) are assignedLearn how every production-relevant element gets a unique label with a type prefix and how those labels are numbered and used.
- Return to an elevation after leaving itGet back to an elevation you left by switching to 3D or floor plan, either from the wall in 3D or from the list beside 3D.
- ଏଲିଭେସନ ପସନ୍ଦରେ ଶଟର ଦିଗ, ୟୁନିଟ ଏବଂ ସେଲ୍ଫ ଆନୋଟେସନ ଟୋଗଲ କରନ୍ତୁଏଲିଭେସନ ପସନ୍ଦରେ ଶଟର ଦିଗ, ୟୁନିଟ ଆନୋଟେସନ ଏବଂ ସେଲ୍ଫ ଆନୋଟେସନ ଚାଲୁ କିମ୍ବା ବନ୍ଦ କରି କେଉଁ ଏଲିଭେସନ ଆନୋଟେସନ ଦେଖାଯିବ ତାହା ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Add a custom cabinet label and center it in 3DTurn off the default labels, add your own multileader label with a small arrow head, and place it at the center of the cabinet.
- Colour-code dimensions and annotationsGive dimensions and annotations colours so drawings are easier to read and important items stand out.
- Control which panels manual dimensioning snaps toChoose which panel types manual dimensioning snaps to in elevations by selecting them in the 'Enable panels for manual dimensioning' setting.
- Create and open a wall section elevation from a wall face in 3DClick a wall's face in 3D to select that wall section, then add an elevation of that face and open it from the Wall Section Elevation list.
- Create an electrical drawing view with legible electrical pointsCreate a new elevation and a view from it, then hide furniture or lighten its layer colour so electrical point annotations and measurements stay legible.
- Generate a 3D model from your 2D cabinet layoutPlace cabinets in the 2D design view and switch to 3D to get the 3D model generated automatically from your layout.
- Run auto dimensioning on a locked elevation viewAdd automatic dimensions to a locked elevation view and fill in anything the automation misses by hand.
- Set the default wall elevation view distance for your organisationSet the distance used when opening a wall elevation view once as an organisation-wide default instead of changing it per view.
- Show material colours on elevations with Rich ViewSwitch an elevation to Rich View so the cabinets display the actual materials applied to them.
- Add a reference level in an elevation viewOpen an elevation view and place a reference level at the height you want, then rename it or change its elevation.
- Configure panel and box labels, fields and logo placementSet which per-panel fields print on panel labels and where the organization logo sits on box labels.
- Create a locked section view and add annotationsGenerate a section with the elevation tool, lock it as a view, and add text from the annotate option.
- Create custom or sectional elevations starting from a cabinetStart an elevation from a specific cabinet to create a custom or sectional elevation.
- ଏକ ଫ୍ଲୋ ପ୍ଲାନରେ ଶଟର ଏବଂ କାଉଣ୍ଟରଟପ ମାପନ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଫ୍ଲୋ ପ୍ଲାନରେ ଶଟର ଏବଂ କାଉଣ୍ଟରଟପକୁ ପଏଣ୍ଟ-ଟୁ-ପଏଣ୍ଟ କିମ୍ବା ଲାଇନ-ଟୁ-ଲାଇନ ଭାବରେ ମାପନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଲାଇନ-ଟୁ-ଲାଇନ ଅଧିକ ପସନ୍ଦନୀୟ।
- Fix incorrect or missing auto dimensionsCheck the dimensioning settings and pick points carefully when auto dimensions come out wrong or absent.
- Get elevation and plan lines generated by defaultLet the design module generate elevation and plan lines so you do not have to draw them from scratch.
- Handle resizing, extensions, and why custom sizes reset when switching handlesOverride a placed handle's width, height and depth, add left/right extensions on profile handles, and see why swapping the handle item resets your customizations.
- Know which View options are enabled in each viewCheck which View menu options are available in the 2D floor plan, in an elevation view and outside an elevation.
- Set slab elevation from the ground floorPlace a slab at the height you want above the ground floor using the Elevation field in the slab tool.
- Show cabinet internals with Skeleton mode in an elevation viewTurn on Skeleton mode in an elevation view to hide the shutters and reveal the cabinet's internal partitions and carcass so you can dimension them directly.
- Switch an elevation from non-rich to rich viewBy default the elevation opens in non-rich (black-and-white) view, and you can switch rich view on.
- ଏଲିଭେସନ କ୍ୟାମେରା ନାମକରଣ ଏବଂ ସେଟିଂସ ବୁଝନ୍ତୁଏକ ନୂଆ ଏଲିଭେସନ କ୍ୟାମେରା କିପରି ଏହାର ପ୍ରକାର ଅନୁସାରେ ନାମିତ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ ଏହାର ବାମ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଓ View toolbar କେଉଁ ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣ ପ୍ରଦାନ କରେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Use electrical and plumbing markings and version trackingLearn that electrical and plumbing markings and version tracking are available in the platform.
- Use plane elevation for side, back or section-style viewsPlace a plane elevation symbol on the floor plan to create side, back or section-style views.
ଆଉଟପୁଟ, QC ଏବଂ ଉତ୍ପାଦନ18
- Which panels are silently excluded from cutlist and production outputsLearn which panels drop out of cutlists, board layouts and production outputs while staying in the 3D design, and how to switch them off deliberately.
- ଏକ ପ୍ରୋଡକ୍ସନ ଡିଜାଇନ କପି ସହିତ ଡିଜାଇନ ଏବଂ ଉତ୍ପାଦନ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଅଲଗା ରଖନ୍ତୁଏକ ଅଲଗା ପ୍ରୋଡକ୍ସନ ଡିଜାଇନ କପି ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ ଦଳ ଏବଂ ଏକ ଉତ୍ପାଦନ ଦଳ ପରସ୍ପରକୁ ଓଭରରାଇଟ ନକରି କାମ କରିପାରିବେ।
- Set cut thickness to panel thickness and include in CAMCreate a cut on a panel with its thickness matched to the panel and the include in CAM option turned on so the cut reaches the CAM output.
- Check violations before generating outputsRun the violation checks that flag sizing, SKU and design-rule problems before pricing, production files and schedules are generated.
- ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍କୁ ଲକ୍ କରି ତାହାକୁ ସ୍ଥିର କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ QC ପରେ ଅନୁମୋଦନ କରନ୍ତୁProject Hub ରୁ ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁ ଯାହାଫଳରେ ଏହା ଯାଞ୍ଚ ହେଉଥିବା ସମୟରେ କୌଣସି ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ ନ ହେବ, ତାପରେ QC ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ ହେଲେ ଏହାକୁ ଅନୁମୋଦନ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Check a design for violationsSee whether the Violations option reports anything for your design, since a clean design shows no violations.
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (18)
- Check manually added hardware in the BOQ, CAM and 3D viewManually added hardware appears in the BOQ but may not affect the CAM output or the 3D view.
- SU ସର୍ଟକଟ ସହିତ Single Unit CAM Mode ପ୍ରବେଶ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ପାଇଁ Single Unit CAM Mode ଖୋଲିବାକୁ ପ୍ରୋଡକ୍ସନ ଡିଜାଇନରେ SU କୀବୋର୍ଡ ସର୍ଟକଟ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Export 3D ଜ୍ୟାମିତି glTF ଭାବରେ ଏବଂ ଉଚ୍ଚତା DWG ଭାବରେକାନ୍ଥ, ଦ୍ୱାର ଏବଂ ଝରକାଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ glTF 3D ମଡେଲ ଭାବରେ ରପ୍ତାନି କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ DWG କେବଳ ଉଚ୍ଚତା ପାଇଁ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Export elevations as DWG/DXF and 3D as GLTFExport an elevation as DWG, DXF or DXB at a chosen Acad version, and export 3D views as GLTF with KHR extensions.
- Exploded View ଆଉଟପୁଟ PDF କିପରି ତିଆରି ହୁଏExploded View ଆଉଟପୁଟ କଣ ତିଆରି କରେ ଏବଂ ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ୟୁନିଟର ଡାଏଗ୍ରାମ, ଲେବଲ ଓ ପାର୍ଟସ ଚାର୍ଟ କିପରି ସଜାଡ଼ା ହୁଏ ତାହା ଦେଖନ୍ତୁ।
- Export 3D ମଡେଲକୁ glTF ଭାବରେ ରଖନ୍ତୁ ତାପରେ sk ଫର୍ମାଟକୁ ରୂପାନ୍ତର କରନ୍ତୁଏକ 3D ମଡେଲକୁ glTF ରେ ଏକ୍ସପୋର୍ଟ କରି, ଏହାକୁ sk ଫର୍ମାଟକୁ ରୂପାନ୍ତର କରି ଏବଂ ଆପଣଙ୍କ ଲକ୍ଷ୍ୟ ଆପ୍ଲିକେସନରେ ଆମଦାନୀ କରି ପ୍ଲାଟଫର୍ମରୁ ବାହାର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- ଆଡମିନ ପସନ୍ଦରୁ ଅବରୋଧିତ ଆଉଟପୁଟ ଡାଉନଲୋଡ ଠିକ କରନ୍ତୁତିନୋଟି ଆଡମିନ ପସନ୍ଦ ଡିଜାଇନରମାନଙ୍କୁ ଆଉଟପୁଟ ଡାଉନଲୋଡ କରିବାରୁ ଅବରୋଧ କରିପାରେ, ଏବଂ ଉଲ୍ଲଂଘନ କାରଣ ହେଲେ ଜଣେ ଆଡମିନ ପ୍ରତି-ଡିଜାଇନ-ଶାଖା ପାଇଁ ରିହାତି ପ୍ରଦାନ କରିପାରିବେ।
- Reassign modular units to renumber cabinet elevationsRenumber cabinet elevations by reassigning modular units in output settings, shifting the sequence so labels run in order.
- Outputs ସେଟିଂସରେ ୟୁନିଟ୍ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ଆନୋଟେସନ୍ ପୁନଃ ନ୍ୟସ୍ତ କରନ୍ତୁଦୁଇଟି ମୋଡ୍ ମଧ୍ୟରୁ ଗୋଟିଏ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଆପଣଙ୍କ ଆଉଟପୁଟ୍ରେ ୟୁନିଟ୍ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ୍ ଲେବଲ୍ ପୁନଃ ସଂଖ୍ୟା ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ, ପ୍ରଥମେ ନିଶ୍ଚିତ କରନ୍ତୁ କାରଣ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ ପୂର୍ବାବସ୍ଥାକୁ ଫେରାଯାଇପାରିବ ନାହିଁ।
- Remove software-generated operations in panel 2D CAMLearn why some operations in panel 2D CAM cannot be deleted directly and how to remove them by reverting the shape.
- ରେଣ୍ଡର ଏବଂ ଉତ୍ପାଦନ ଆଉଟପୁଟ୍ରେ ସ୍ତର ପରିସର ବୁଝନ୍ତୁଆପଣ ଯେଉଁ ସ୍ତରରୁ ରେଣ୍ଡର ଫାୟାର କରନ୍ତି, ରେଣ୍ଡର ସେହି ସ୍ତର ପରିସରକୁ କିପରି ମାନେ ଏବଂ ଉତ୍ପାଦନ ଆଉଟପୁଟ୍ ସର୍ବଦା ସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଅନ୍ତର୍ଭୁକ୍ତ କରେ, ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- ସୂଚୀ, ମିଶ୍ରିତ BOQ ଏବଂ ସୂଚୀ ଟେମ୍ପଲେଟ୍ ବୁଝନ୍ତୁସୂଚୀ-ଆଧାରିତ ଆଉଟପୁଟ୍ ଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଲୁକ୍କାୟିତ ଏବଂ ୱାର୍କସ୍କୋପ୍-ବାଦ ଦିଆଯାଇଥିବା ଉପାଦାନଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ କିପରି ବ୍ୟବହାର କରେ, କ୍ୟାବିନେଟ୍ ମିଶ୍ରିତ BOQ କିପରି ପ୍ରିଣ୍ଟ ହୁଏ, ଏବଂ ସୂଚୀଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ କିପରି ସଞ୍ଚୟ ଏବଂ ରପ୍ତାନି କରିବେ ଶିଖନ୍ତୁ।
ମୂଲ୍ୟ ଏବଂ କୋଟେସନ5
- Choose a pricing quotation layout templatePick the template that groups and orders the rows of the printed quote the way you want.
- କିପରି ଆନୁପାତିକ ଚାର୍ଜଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଆଇଟମ ମୂଲ୍ୟରେ ସମାବେଶ କରାଯାଏଡିଜାଇନ-ସ୍ତରୀୟ ଆନୁପାତିକ ଚାର୍ଜଗୁଡ଼ିକ କିପରି କୋଟ ଆଇଟମଗୁଡ଼ିକରେ ବିଭକ୍ତ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ କାହିଁକି ପ୍ରତି-ଏକକ ମୂଲ୍ୟ ତାପରେ କାଟାଲଗ ମୂଲ୍ୟଠାରୁ ଅଧିକ ଦେଖାଯାଏ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- How quotation discounts are calculatedLearn how discounts on a quotation are configured per item type and applied successively after SKU-level discounts are reserved.
- How quotation row overrides apply across a designLearn which quotation row changes apply to every row of the same SKU and which stay per design item.
- How per-set SKU quantities are rounded in schedulesUnderstand why per-set hardware quantities round up once at the design level while per-cabinet listings show consumed base quantities.
ପସନ୍ଦ, ସହଯୋଗ ଏବଂ ଆଡମିନ28
- Lock a design and unlock it as a project managerLock a design so no changes can be made until a project manager unlocks it, either from the admin portal or after a request.
- What locking a design blocks and what it still allowsLocking a design stops changes from being saved while anyone with access can still open, view and generate cut lists and board layouts from it.
- ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଅନୁମୋଦନ, ଲକ୍ ଏବଂ ଅନଲକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ଅନୁମୋଦନ କରିବା, ଏହାକୁ ଆଉ ସମ୍ପାଦନାରୁ ସୁରକ୍ଷିତ ରଖିବା ଏବଂ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ହେଲେ ଏହାକୁ ପୁନର୍ବାର ଅନଲକ୍ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ସଫ୍ଟୱେରର ନିୟନ୍ତ୍ରଣଗୁଡ଼ିକ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ।
- How cloud designs save and stay visible to the adminLearn how cloud-based designs save automatically, who can see them, and how to clone one within a project.
- Fix a reconnecting popup and avoid losing unsaved changesWhen the reconnecting popup appears, reloading warns that some changes may not be saved and loses anything made after the connection became unstable.
- Undo a change without removing connectorsUse undo after a change to return the design to its previous state.
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (28)
- ସହ-ଡିଜାଇନିଂ: ଜଣେ ସହଯୋଗୀ ସେଭ୍ କଲାବେଳେ ସେଭ୍ ନହୋଇଥିବା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ ହଜିଯାଏସହ-ଡିଜାଇନିଂ ସମୟରେ ଜଣେ ସହଯୋଗୀ ସେଭ୍ କଲାବେଳେ ଆପଣଙ୍କ ସେଭ୍ ନହୋଇଥିବା ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନଗୁଡ଼ିକର କଣ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ କାମ ହରାଇବାରୁ କିପରି ବଞ୍ଚିବେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Control whether designers see construction optionsFind out what decides whether a designer can see construction-related options such as changing construction or item parameters.
- ଆଡମିନ ପୋର୍ଟାଲରୁ ଜଣେ ଡିଜାଇନରଙ୍କ ଡିଜାଇନକୁ ନିଜକୁ ଆକ୍ସେସ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁଆଡମିନ ପୋର୍ଟାଲର Design Hub ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି, ଜଣେ ଡିଜାଇନର ମାନୁଆଲି ଭାବେ ସେୟାର କରିନଥିବା ଏକ ଡିଜାଇନକୁ ନିଜକୁ ଆକ୍ସେସ ଦିଅନ୍ତୁ।
- Hide unedited LHS and RHS fillers instead of deleting themHide left-hand-side and right-hand-side fillers that have not been edited directly in the design rather than deleting them.
- Keep offline design changes by leaving the design space openKeep the design space open until the connection returns so your pending changes are saved.
- Refresh cache and replace cabinets after SKU structure changesAfter changing the SKU structure in the catalogue, refresh the cache and replace the cabinets in the design portal so the SKUs reflect the admin change.
- Activate or deactivate an automation ruleSet a rule's Rule Activation to True or False to control whether it is applied to the design when rules run.
- ଆଡମିନ ପୋର୍ଟାଲ ବଲ୍କ ଆକ୍ସନ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଡ୍ରୟର ତଳ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଅଫସେଟ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନ କରନ୍ତୁବଲ୍କ ଆକ୍ସନ ଏବଂ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ-ସ୍ତରୀୟ ସମ୍ପାଦନ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରି ଆଡମିନ ପୋର୍ଟାଲ ମାଧ୍ୟମରେ ଡ୍ରୟର ତଳ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଅଫସେଟ ସେଟ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଏବଂ ସାମଗ୍ରୀକୁ ଉପଯୁକ୍ତ ହେଉଥିବା ଏକ ମୋଟେଇ ବାଛନ୍ତୁ।
- Feature flags cannot be scoped to shutters onlyFeature flags can be enabled, disabled, or disabled for designers, but they apply to a whole feature area rather than a single part such as shutters.
- Find and set size limits on catalogue modelsOpen a hardware catalogue item to see the exact limits enforced and set the allowed range designers can use.
- Find the lock warning alert for a locked designLearn where the warning that changes to a locked design will not be saved appears on screen.
- Fix SKU structure rules in a design with bulk editMake the SKUs or cabinets in a design follow the SKU structure rules by selecting all and running the bulk edit SKU structure action.
- ସେଭ୍ ଅସମ୍ପୂର୍ଣ୍ଣ ଥିବାବେଳେ reload, back ଏବଂ forward କିପରି ସୁରକ୍ଷିତ ରଖାଯାଏସେଭ୍ ଚାଲୁଥିବାବେଳେ reload, back କିମ୍ବା forward ପୂର୍ବରୁ ପ୍ଲାଟଫର୍ମ ଆପଣଙ୍କୁ କିପରି ସତର୍କ କରେ ଏବଂ reload କେବେ ବି ଆପଣଙ୍କ ଉପରେ ବାଧ୍ୟତାମୂଳକ ନୁହେଁ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- ପୁନଃଲୋଡ୍ ମଧ୍ୟରେ ନାଭବାରରେ ଏକ ରୁମ୍ ଚୟନିତ ରଖନ୍ତୁନାଭବାରର ରୁମ୍ ଚୟନ କିପରି ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ସହିତ ସଞ୍ଚିତ ହୁଏ ଏବଂ ଏହାକୁ କିପରି ସଫା କରିବେ କିମ୍ବା ସୁରକ୍ଷିତ ଭାବରେ ପୁନଃଲୋଡ୍ କରିବେ ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- ଡିଜାଇନରଙ୍କ ଦୃଷ୍ଟିକୋଣରୁ ବିନ୍ୟାସ ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ଡିଜାଇନର ଭାବରେ ପୂର୍ବାବଲୋକନ କରନ୍ତୁଏକ ଟିମ୍ ପାଇଁ ଡିଜାଇନ ପାରାମିଟର ବିନ୍ୟାସ କରିବା ସମୟରେ 'preview as designer' ବିକଳ୍ପ ବ୍ୟବହାର କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଦ୍ୱାରା ବିନ୍ୟାସ ଜଣେ ଡିଜାଇନରଙ୍କୁ କେମିତି ଦେଖାଯାଏ ତାହା ଆପଣ ଦେଖିପାରିବେ।
- Recover lost active sales channel via PreferencesRecover the active sales channel for a design that shows it has been lost by selecting the correct channel in Preferences.
- ସିଷ୍ଟମ ଅପଡେଟ ପରେ ଡିଜାଇନ କ୍ୟାଚେ ରିଫ୍ରେସ କରନ୍ତୁସିଷ୍ଟମ ଅପଡେଟ ପରେ ଡିଜାଇନ କ୍ୟାଚେ ରିଫ୍ରେସ କରନ୍ତୁ, ଯାହାଫଳରେ ନୂତନ ସେଟିଂସ ଓ ପରିବର୍ତ୍ତନଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଡିଜାଇନ ପରିବେଶରେ ସଠିକ ଭାବରେ ଦେଖାଯିବ।
- ପରବର୍ତ୍ତୀ କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ନ ଥିଲେ ହିଁ ଏକ ସଂସ୍କରଣ ପୁନଃସ୍ଥାପନ କରନ୍ତୁଏହା ପରେ କରାଯାଇଥିବା କାର୍ଯ୍ୟ ଆଉ ଆବଶ୍ୟକ ନ ଥିଲେ ହିଁ ପୂର୍ବ ସଂସ୍କରଣ ପୁନଃସ୍ଥାପନ କରନ୍ତୁ, କିମ୍ବା ପ୍ରଥମେ ବର୍ତ୍ତମାନ ସ୍ଥିତିକୁ ଏକ ସଂସ୍କରଣ ଭାବରେ ସଞ୍ଚୟ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- See which catalogue items are hidden and whyFind out how the carousel filters items by size and read the exact limit and your current dimension for each hidden item.
- Use bulk editing to apply changes across a whole categoryApply a change to an entire category at once instead of editing units one by one.
- Use ready-made internal configuration options for client discussionsUse ready-made internal configuration options to hold quick design discussions with a client.
- Why handles are hidden in the catalog pickerLearn why handle, gola and profile-handle items disappear from the picker for a shutter and where to find them.
ଡିଜାଇନ ୱାର୍କସ୍ପେସ ସମସ୍ୟା ସମାଧାନ19
- ଡ୍ରୟର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ଠିକ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଏବଂ ଡ୍ରୟର ନିର୍ମାଣ ଅଫସେଟଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଶୂନ୍ୟ କରନ୍ତୁଉଚ୍ଚତା କିମ୍ବା ଫିଟ୍ ଭୁଲ ଥିବା ଏକ ଡ୍ରୟରର ଉଚ୍ଚତା ମୂଲ୍ୟ ଯାଞ୍ଚ କରି ଏବଂ ଏହାକୁ ପ୍ରଭାବିତ କରୁଥିବା ପ୍ୟାନେଲ ଏବଂ ତଳ ଅଫସେଟଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ଶୂନ୍ୟ କରି ତାହା ଠିକ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Make drawers in a set share the same heightSwitch off Fixed Height on each drawer so the system sizes them equally, and fix shelves above drawers.
- Fix a drawer that protrudes past the back panelCorrect a drawer sticking out past the back panel by choosing a channel whose depth matches the usable cabinet depth.
- Fix a drawer that crosses the cabinet frontCheck the Drawer Back Gap on an external drawer so the drawer stops crossing the cabinet front.
- SketchUp-ଆମଦାନୀ ହୋଇଥିବା ଶଟରଗୁଡ଼ିକ ପାଇଁ ଉତ୍ପାଦନ ବିବରଣୀ ପ୍ରାପ୍ତ କରନ୍ତୁSketchUp (.skp) ଫାଇଲ୍ ଅପଲୋଡ୍ କରି ଶଟର ଡିଜାଇନ୍ Infurnia କୁ ଅଣାଯାଇପାରେ, କିନ୍ତୁ ଆମଦାନୀ ହୋଇଥିବା ଶଟରଗୁଡ଼ିକ ଉତ୍ପାଦନ ବିବରଣୀ ସୃଷ୍ଟି କରନ୍ତି ନାହିଁ।
- କ୍ୟାନଭାସର ଉପର ସ୍ଥିତି ବାର ବ୍ୟାନରଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ପଢ଼ନ୍ତୁକ୍ୟାନଭାସର ଉପରେ ଥିବା ପ୍ରତ୍ୟେକ ବ୍ୟାନରର ଅର୍ଥ ଏବଂ ଏହା ଯେଉଁ ସ୍ଥିତି ଜଣାଉଛି ତାହା କିପରି ହଟାଇବେ ତାହା ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
ସବୁ ଦେଖାନ୍ତୁ (19)
- Fix a disabled wall tool when drawing wallsSwitch to the floor level and 2D floor plan so the wall tool becomes available again.
- Set laminate grain direction manuallySet or correct the grain direction of a laminate manually with the manual edit option.
- 3D ମୋଡରେ ଟୁଲଗୁଡ଼ିକ କାହିଁକି ଧୂସର ଦେଖାଯାଏଆପଣ 3D ମୋଡକୁ ସୁଇଚ କଲାବେଳେ କିଛି ଡିଜାଇନ ଟୁଲବାର ଟୁଲ କାହିଁକି ଧୂସର ଦେଖାଯାଏ ଜାଣନ୍ତୁ।
- Find the What's New entry in the property panelScroll up in the property panel box on the left to reveal the blue What's New entry, which sits in the same panel as viewport navigation, global preferences and settings.
- ଲୋଡ୍ ହେଉନଥିବା ଏକ 3D ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ଠିକ୍ କରନ୍ତୁଯଦି 3D ଦୃଶ୍ୟ ଲୋଡ୍ ହେଉନାହିଁ ଏବଂ ଏକ ତ୍ରୁଟି WebGL 2.0 ଏବଂ GPU ହାର୍ଡୱେର ଆକ୍ସିଲେରେସନ୍ ମାଗୁଛି, ତେବେ ଆପଣଙ୍କ ବ୍ରାଉଜର ଡିଜାଇନ୍ ରେଣ୍ଡର କରିପାରିବ ନାହିଁ।
- Fix a panel's internal finish that will not changeWhen a panel's internal finish will not change in any output, an automation rule may be overriding it.
- Move internal drawers back and shorten fillers in a drawer systemSet Drawer Offset(from front) to push an internal drawer set's boxes and fascias back, and Fillers Depth Reduction to shorten the fillers from the front.
- Set X offset to zero at filler panel levelSet the X offset to zero when working at the filler panel level so the placement is correct.
- ତିଆରି ହୋଇଥିବା ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲର ଦିଗ ସଠିକ୍ କରିବା ପାଇଁ ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲ ଓରିଏଣ୍ଟେସନ ଟୋଗଲ କରନ୍ତୁଟାଇଲିଂ ଏବଂ କଟିଂ ଟୁଲରେ କାନ୍ଥ ଏବଂ ଉପର ଆକୃତି ଚୟନ କରନ୍ତୁ, ତାପରେ ଭୁଲ ଦିଗକୁ ମୁହାଁଉଥିବା ତିଆରି ହୋଇଥିବା ପ୍ରୋଫାଇଲକୁ ଫ୍ଲିପ କରନ୍ତୁ।
- Understand cabinet boundary box colours when snappingLearn what a red boundary box means while you place cabinets.
- Understand why filler cabinets show a carcass box in floorplanLearn why a filler cabinet appears as a box in plan and what that box's size reflects.
- Why Flip Sides is greyed out on a two-way doorLearn why Flip Sides cannot be used on a door whose 'Enable 2-way opening' is ticked, while Flip Hinge stays available.
- Why keyboard shortcuts stop responding in the canvasLearn which states intentionally ignore canvas keyboard shortcuts so you know when to wait instead of retrying.